2009-04-02 Christophe Lyon <christophe.lyon@st.com>
[deliverable/binutils-gdb.git] / ld / ld.texinfo
CommitLineData
252b5132
RH
1\input texinfo
2@setfilename ld.info
a2b64bed 3@c Copyright 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000,
8a308ae8
NC
4@c 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009
5@c Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 6@syncodeindex ky cp
dff70155 7@c man begin INCLUDE
252b5132
RH
8@include configdoc.texi
9@c (configdoc.texi is generated by the Makefile)
c428fa83 10@include bfdver.texi
dff70155 11@c man end
252b5132
RH
12
13@c @smallbook
14
ff5dcc92
SC
15@macro gcctabopt{body}
16@code{\body\}
17@end macro
18
0285c67d
NC
19@c man begin NAME
20@ifset man
21@c Configure for the generation of man pages
22@set UsesEnvVars
23@set GENERIC
0285c67d 24@set ARM
49fa1e15 25@set H8300
0285c67d 26@set HPPA
0285c67d 27@set I960
0285c67d 28@set M68HC11
7fb9f789 29@set M68K
3c3bdf30 30@set MMIX
2469cfa2 31@set MSP430
2a60a7a8
AM
32@set POWERPC
33@set POWERPC64
49fa1e15
AM
34@set Renesas
35@set SPU
36@set TICOFF
2ca22b03 37@set WIN32
e0001a05 38@set XTENSA
0285c67d
NC
39@end ifset
40@c man end
41
252b5132
RH
42@ifinfo
43@format
44START-INFO-DIR-ENTRY
45* Ld: (ld). The GNU linker.
46END-INFO-DIR-ENTRY
47@end format
48@end ifinfo
49
0e9517a9 50@copying
e49e529d
JM
51This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker LD
52@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
53@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
54@end ifset
55version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 56
0e9517a9 57Copyright @copyright{} 1991, 92, 93, 94, 95, 96, 97, 98, 99, 2000,
8a308ae8 582001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 59
cf055d54 60Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 61under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
cf055d54
NC
62or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
63with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
64Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 65section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0e9517a9 66@end copying
252b5132
RH
67@iftex
68@finalout
69@setchapternewpage odd
71ba23f6 70@settitle The GNU linker
252b5132 71@titlepage
71ba23f6 72@title The GNU linker
252b5132 73@sp 1
e49e529d
JM
74@subtitle @code{ld}
75@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
76@subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
77@end ifset
252b5132
RH
78@subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
79@author Steve Chamberlain
80@author Ian Lance Taylor
252b5132
RH
81@page
82
83@tex
84{\parskip=0pt
704c465c
NC
85\hfill Red Hat Inc\par
86\hfill nickc\@credhat.com, doc\@redhat.com\par
71ba23f6 87\hfill {\it The GNU linker}\par
252b5132
RH
88\hfill Edited by Jeffrey Osier (jeffrey\@cygnus.com)\par
89}
90\global\parindent=0pt % Steve likes it this way.
91@end tex
92
93@vskip 0pt plus 1filll
0285c67d 94@c man begin COPYRIGHT
9c8ebd6a 95Copyright @copyright{} 1991, 92, 93, 94, 95, 96, 97, 98, 99, 2000, 2001,
903249d7 962002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 97
0285c67d 98Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 99under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
0285c67d
NC
100or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
101with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
102Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 103section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0285c67d 104@c man end
252b5132 105
252b5132
RH
106@end titlepage
107@end iftex
4ecceb71 108@contents
252b5132
RH
109@c FIXME: Talk about importance of *order* of args, cmds to linker!
110
84ec0e6d 111@ifnottex
252b5132 112@node Top
71ba23f6 113@top LD
e49e529d
JM
114This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker ld
115@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
116@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
117@end ifset
118version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 119
cf055d54 120This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
793c5807
NC
121Documentation License version 1.3. A copy of the license is included
122in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
cf055d54 123
252b5132
RH
124@menu
125* Overview:: Overview
126* Invocation:: Invocation
127* Scripts:: Linker Scripts
128@ifset GENERIC
129* Machine Dependent:: Machine Dependent Features
130@end ifset
131@ifclear GENERIC
132@ifset H8300
133* H8/300:: ld and the H8/300
134@end ifset
c2dcd04e
NC
135@ifset Renesas
136* Renesas:: ld and other Renesas micros
252b5132
RH
137@end ifset
138@ifset I960
139* i960:: ld and the Intel 960 family
140@end ifset
36f63dca
NC
141@ifset ARM
142* ARM:: ld and the ARM family
143@end ifset
144@ifset HPPA
145* HPPA ELF32:: ld and HPPA 32-bit ELF
146@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
147@ifset M68HC11
148* M68HC11/68HC12:: ld and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
149@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
150@ifset M68K
151* M68K:: ld and Motorola 68K family
152@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
153@ifset POWERPC
154* PowerPC ELF32:: ld and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
155@end ifset
156@ifset POWERPC64
157* PowerPC64 ELF64:: ld and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
158@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
159@ifset SPU
160* SPU ELF:: ld and SPU ELF Support
161@end ifset
74459f0e
TW
162@ifset TICOFF
163* TI COFF:: ld and the TI COFF
164@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
165@ifset WIN32
166* Win32:: ld and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
167@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
168@ifset XTENSA
169* Xtensa:: ld and Xtensa Processors
170@end ifset
252b5132
RH
171@end ifclear
172@ifclear SingleFormat
173* BFD:: BFD
174@end ifclear
175@c Following blank line required for remaining bug in makeinfo conds/menus
176
177* Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
178* MRI:: MRI Compatible Script Files
704c465c 179* GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
370b66a1 180* LD Index:: LD Index
252b5132 181@end menu
84ec0e6d 182@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
183
184@node Overview
185@chapter Overview
186
187@cindex @sc{gnu} linker
188@cindex what is this?
0285c67d 189
0879a67a 190@ifset man
0285c67d 191@c man begin SYNOPSIS
ff5dcc92 192ld [@b{options}] @var{objfile} @dots{}
0285c67d
NC
193@c man end
194
195@c man begin SEEALSO
196ar(1), nm(1), objcopy(1), objdump(1), readelf(1) and
197the Info entries for @file{binutils} and
198@file{ld}.
199@c man end
200@end ifset
201
202@c man begin DESCRIPTION
203
ff5dcc92 204@command{ld} combines a number of object and archive files, relocates
252b5132 205their data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in
ff5dcc92 206compiling a program is to run @command{ld}.
252b5132 207
ff5dcc92 208@command{ld} accepts Linker Command Language files written in
252b5132
RH
209a superset of AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax,
210to provide explicit and total control over the linking process.
211
0285c67d
NC
212@ifset man
213@c For the man only
ece2d90e 214This man page does not describe the command language; see the
71ba23f6
NC
215@command{ld} entry in @code{info} for full details on the command
216language and on other aspects of the GNU linker.
0285c67d
NC
217@end ifset
218
252b5132 219@ifclear SingleFormat
ff5dcc92
SC
220This version of @command{ld} uses the general purpose BFD libraries
221to operate on object files. This allows @command{ld} to read, combine, and
252b5132
RH
222write object files in many different formats---for example, COFF or
223@code{a.out}. Different formats may be linked together to produce any
224available kind of object file. @xref{BFD}, for more information.
225@end ifclear
226
227Aside from its flexibility, the @sc{gnu} linker is more helpful than other
228linkers in providing diagnostic information. Many linkers abandon
229execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
ff5dcc92 230@command{ld} continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors
252b5132
RH
231(or, in some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
232
0285c67d
NC
233@c man end
234
252b5132
RH
235@node Invocation
236@chapter Invocation
237
0285c67d
NC
238@c man begin DESCRIPTION
239
ff5dcc92 240The @sc{gnu} linker @command{ld} is meant to cover a broad range of situations,
252b5132
RH
241and to be as compatible as possible with other linkers. As a result,
242you have many choices to control its behavior.
243
0285c67d
NC
244@c man end
245
252b5132
RH
246@ifset UsesEnvVars
247@menu
248* Options:: Command Line Options
249* Environment:: Environment Variables
250@end menu
251
252@node Options
253@section Command Line Options
254@end ifset
255
256@cindex command line
257@cindex options
0285c67d
NC
258
259@c man begin OPTIONS
260
252b5132
RH
261The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
262practice few of them are used in any particular context.
263@cindex standard Unix system
ff5dcc92 264For instance, a frequent use of @command{ld} is to link standard Unix
252b5132
RH
265object files on a standard, supported Unix system. On such a system, to
266link a file @code{hello.o}:
267
268@smallexample
269ld -o @var{output} /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
270@end smallexample
271
ff5dcc92 272This tells @command{ld} to produce a file called @var{output} as the
252b5132
RH
273result of linking the file @code{/lib/crt0.o} with @code{hello.o} and
274the library @code{libc.a}, which will come from the standard search
275directories. (See the discussion of the @samp{-l} option below.)
276
ff5dcc92 277Some of the command-line options to @command{ld} may be specified at any
511ab9e9
ILT
278point in the command line. However, options which refer to files, such
279as @samp{-l} or @samp{-T}, cause the file to be read at the point at
280which the option appears in the command line, relative to the object
281files and other file options. Repeating non-file options with a
282different argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
252b5132
RH
283occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
284option. Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
285noted in the descriptions below.
286
287@cindex object files
511ab9e9
ILT
288Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be linked
289together. They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with command-line
290options, except that an object file argument may not be placed between
291an option and its argument.
252b5132
RH
292
293Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you can
294specify other forms of binary input files using @samp{-l}, @samp{-R},
295and the script command language. If @emph{no} binary input files at all
296are specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
297message @samp{No input files}.
298
36f63dca 299If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
252b5132
RH
300assume that it is a linker script. A script specified in this way
301augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
302linker script or the one specified by using @samp{-T}). This feature
303permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
304or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
53d25da6
AM
305@code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} to load other objects. Specifying a
306script in this way merely augments the main linker script, with the
307extra commands placed after the main script; use the @samp{-T} option
308to replace the default linker script entirely, but note the effect of
309the @code{INSERT} command. @xref{Scripts}.
252b5132
RH
310
311For options whose names are a single letter,
312option arguments must either follow the option letter without intervening
313whitespace, or be given as separate arguments immediately following the
314option that requires them.
315
316For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two can
e4897a32 317precede the option name; for example, @samp{-trace-symbol} and
36f63dca 318@samp{--trace-symbol} are equivalent. Note---there is one exception to
e4897a32 319this rule. Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
ba1be17e 320only be preceded by two dashes. This is to reduce confusion with the
e4897a32
NC
321@samp{-o} option. So for example @samp{-omagic} sets the output file
322name to @samp{magic} whereas @samp{--omagic} sets the NMAGIC flag on the
323output.
324
325Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from the
326option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
327immediately following the option that requires them. For example,
328@samp{--trace-symbol foo} and @samp{--trace-symbol=foo} are equivalent.
329Unique abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are
330accepted.
252b5132 331
36f63dca
NC
332Note---if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler driver
333(e.g. @samp{gcc}) then all the linker command line options should be
fa19fce0
NC
334prefixed by @samp{-Wl,} (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
335compiler driver) like this:
4e53152f
NC
336
337@smallexample
2509a395 338 gcc -Wl,--start-group foo.o bar.o -Wl,--end-group
4e53152f
NC
339@end smallexample
340
341This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
2509a395
SL
342silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link. Confusion
343may also arise when passing options that require values through a
344driver, as the use of a space between option and argument acts as
345a separator, and causes the driver to pass only the option to the linker
346and the argument to the compiler. In this case, it is simplest to use
347the joined forms of both single- and multiple-letter options, such as:
348
349@smallexample
350 gcc foo.o bar.o -Wl,-eENTRY -Wl,-Map=a.map
351@end smallexample
4e53152f
NC
352
353Here is a table of the generic command line switches accepted by the GNU
354linker:
355
ff5dcc92 356@table @gcctabopt
38fc1cb1 357@include at-file.texi
dff70155 358
2509a395
SL
359@kindex -a @var{keyword}
360@item -a @var{keyword}
252b5132
RH
361This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility. The @var{keyword}
362argument must be one of the strings @samp{archive}, @samp{shared}, or
363@samp{default}. @samp{-aarchive} is functionally equivalent to
364@samp{-Bstatic}, and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent
365to @samp{-Bdynamic}. This option may be used any number of times.
366
367@ifset I960
368@cindex architectures
2509a395
SL
369@kindex -A @var{arch}
370@item -A @var{architecture}
252b5132
RH
371@kindex --architecture=@var{arch}
372@itemx --architecture=@var{architecture}
ff5dcc92
SC
373In the current release of @command{ld}, this option is useful only for the
374Intel 960 family of architectures. In that @command{ld} configuration, the
252b5132
RH
375@var{architecture} argument identifies the particular architecture in
376the 960 family, enabling some safeguards and modifying the
ff5dcc92 377archive-library search path. @xref{i960,,@command{ld} and the Intel 960
252b5132
RH
378family}, for details.
379
ff5dcc92 380Future releases of @command{ld} may support similar functionality for
252b5132
RH
381other architecture families.
382@end ifset
383
384@ifclear SingleFormat
385@cindex binary input format
386@kindex -b @var{format}
387@kindex --format=@var{format}
388@cindex input format
389@cindex input format
390@item -b @var{input-format}
391@itemx --format=@var{input-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
392@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
393file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 394@samp{-b} option to specify the binary format for input object files
ff5dcc92 395that follow this option on the command line. Even when @command{ld} is
252b5132 396configured to support alternative object formats, you don't usually need
ff5dcc92 397to specify this, as @command{ld} should be configured to expect as a
252b5132
RH
398default input format the most usual format on each machine.
399@var{input-format} is a text string, the name of a particular format
400supported by the BFD libraries. (You can list the available binary
401formats with @samp{objdump -i}.)
402@xref{BFD}.
403
404You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an unusual
405binary format. You can also use @samp{-b} to switch formats explicitly (when
406linking object files of different formats), by including
407@samp{-b @var{input-format}} before each group of object files in a
a1ab1d2a 408particular format.
252b5132
RH
409
410The default format is taken from the environment variable
411@code{GNUTARGET}.
412@ifset UsesEnvVars
413@xref{Environment}.
414@end ifset
415You can also define the input format from a script, using the command
0285c67d
NC
416@code{TARGET};
417@ifclear man
418see @ref{Format Commands}.
419@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
420@end ifclear
421
422@kindex -c @var{MRI-cmdfile}
423@kindex --mri-script=@var{MRI-cmdfile}
424@cindex compatibility, MRI
425@item -c @var{MRI-commandfile}
426@itemx --mri-script=@var{MRI-commandfile}
ff5dcc92 427For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, @command{ld} accepts script
252b5132 428files written in an alternate, restricted command language, described in
0285c67d
NC
429@ifclear man
430@ref{MRI,,MRI Compatible Script Files}.
431@end ifclear
432@ifset man
433the MRI Compatible Script Files section of GNU ld documentation.
434@end ifset
435Introduce MRI script files with
252b5132 436the option @samp{-c}; use the @samp{-T} option to run linker
ff5dcc92
SC
437scripts written in the general-purpose @command{ld} scripting language.
438If @var{MRI-cmdfile} does not exist, @command{ld} looks for it in the directories
252b5132
RH
439specified by any @samp{-L} options.
440
441@cindex common allocation
442@kindex -d
443@kindex -dc
444@kindex -dp
a1ab1d2a 445@item -d
252b5132
RH
446@itemx -dc
447@itemx -dp
448These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported for
449compatibility with other linkers. They assign space to common symbols
450even if a relocatable output file is specified (with @samp{-r}). The
451script command @code{FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
452@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
453
454@cindex entry point, from command line
455@kindex -e @var{entry}
456@kindex --entry=@var{entry}
a1ab1d2a 457@item -e @var{entry}
252b5132
RH
458@itemx --entry=@var{entry}
459Use @var{entry} as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
460program, rather than the default entry point. If there is no symbol
461named @var{entry}, the linker will try to parse @var{entry} as a number,
462and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted in
463base 10; you may use a leading @samp{0x} for base 16, or a leading
464@samp{0} for base 8). @xref{Entry Point}, for a discussion of defaults
465and other ways of specifying the entry point.
466
b58f81ae
DJ
467@kindex --exclude-libs
468@item --exclude-libs @var{lib},@var{lib},...
469Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should not be automatically
e1c37eb5 470exported. The library names may be delimited by commas or colons. Specifying
b58f81ae
DJ
471@code{--exclude-libs ALL} excludes symbols in all archive libraries from
472automatic export. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted
473port of the linker and for ELF targeted ports. For i386 PE, symbols
474explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported, regardless of this
475option. For ELF targeted ports, symbols affected by this option will
476be treated as hidden.
477
e1c37eb5
DK
478@kindex --exclude-modules-for-implib
479@item --exclude-modules-for-implib @var{module},@var{module},...
480Specifies a list of object files or archive members, from which symbols
481should not be automatically exported, but which should be copied wholesale
482into the import library being generated during the link. The module names
483may be delimited by commas or colons, and must match exactly the filenames
484used by @command{ld} to open the files; for archive members, this is simply
485the member name, but for object files the name listed must include and
486match precisely any path used to specify the input file on the linker's
487command-line. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted port
488of the linker. Symbols explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported,
489regardless of this option.
490
252b5132
RH
491@cindex dynamic symbol table
492@kindex -E
493@kindex --export-dynamic
494@item -E
495@itemx --export-dynamic
496When creating a dynamically linked executable, add all symbols to the
497dynamic symbol table. The dynamic symbol table is the set of symbols
498which are visible from dynamic objects at run time.
499
500If you do not use this option, the dynamic symbol table will normally
501contain only those symbols which are referenced by some dynamic object
502mentioned in the link.
503
504If you use @code{dlopen} to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
505back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
506dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
507linking the program itself.
508
55255dae 509You can also use the dynamic list to control what symbols should
cb840a31 510be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports it.
55255dae 511See the description of @samp{--dynamic-list}.
cb840a31 512
36f63dca 513@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
514@cindex big-endian objects
515@cindex endianness
516@kindex -EB
517@item -EB
518Link big-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
519
520@cindex little-endian objects
521@kindex -EL
522@item -EL
523Link little-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
36f63dca 524@end ifclear
252b5132 525
2509a395
SL
526@kindex -f @var{name}
527@kindex --auxiliary=@var{name}
528@item -f @var{name}
529@itemx --auxiliary=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
530When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY field
531to the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol
532table of the shared object should be used as an auxiliary filter on the
533symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
534
535If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
536run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY field. If
537the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter object, it will
538first check whether there is a definition in the shared object
539@var{name}. If there is one, it will be used instead of the definition
540in the filter object. The shared object @var{name} need not exist.
541Thus the shared object @var{name} may be used to provide an alternative
542implementation of certain functions, perhaps for debugging or for
543machine specific performance.
544
545This option may be specified more than once. The DT_AUXILIARY entries
546will be created in the order in which they appear on the command line.
547
2509a395
SL
548@kindex -F @var{name}
549@kindex --filter=@var{name}
252b5132 550@item -F @var{name}
2509a395 551@itemx --filter=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
552When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER field to
553the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol table
554of the shared object which is being created should be used as a filter
555on the symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
556
557If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
558run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER field. The
559dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the symbol table of the
560filter object as usual, but it will actually link to the definitions
561found in the shared object @var{name}. Thus the filter object can be
562used to select a subset of the symbols provided by the object
563@var{name}.
564
ff5dcc92 565Some older linkers used the @option{-F} option throughout a compilation
252b5132 566toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and output
36f63dca
NC
567object files.
568@ifclear SingleFormat
569The @sc{gnu} linker uses other mechanisms for this purpose: the
ece2d90e 570@option{-b}, @option{--format}, @option{--oformat} options, the
252b5132 571@code{TARGET} command in linker scripts, and the @code{GNUTARGET}
36f63dca
NC
572environment variable.
573@end ifclear
574The @sc{gnu} linker will ignore the @option{-F} option when not
575creating an ELF shared object.
252b5132 576
3dbf70a2 577@cindex finalization function
2509a395
SL
578@kindex -fini=@var{name}
579@item -fini=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
580When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
581executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to the
582address of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_fini} as
583the function to call.
584
252b5132
RH
585@kindex -g
586@item -g
587Ignored. Provided for compatibility with other tools.
588
2509a395
SL
589@kindex -G @var{value}
590@kindex --gpsize=@var{value}
252b5132 591@cindex object size
2509a395 592@item -G @var{value}
252b5132
RH
593@itemx --gpsize=@var{value}
594Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP register to
595@var{size}. This is only meaningful for object file formats such as
596MIPS ECOFF which supports putting large and small objects into different
597sections. This is ignored for other object file formats.
598
599@cindex runtime library name
2509a395 600@kindex -h @var{name}
252b5132 601@kindex -soname=@var{name}
2509a395 602@item -h @var{name}
252b5132
RH
603@itemx -soname=@var{name}
604When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME field to
605the specified name. When an executable is linked with a shared object
606which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the executable is run the dynamic
607linker will attempt to load the shared object specified by the DT_SONAME
608field rather than the using the file name given to the linker.
609
610@kindex -i
611@cindex incremental link
612@item -i
613Perform an incremental link (same as option @samp{-r}).
614
3dbf70a2 615@cindex initialization function
2509a395
SL
616@kindex -init=@var{name}
617@item -init=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
618When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
619executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to the address
620of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_init} as the
621function to call.
622
252b5132 623@cindex archive files, from cmd line
2509a395 624@kindex -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf 625@kindex --library=@var{namespec}
2509a395 626@item -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf
RS
627@itemx --library=@var{namespec}
628Add the archive or object file specified by @var{namespec} to the
629list of files to link. This option may be used any number of times.
630If @var{namespec} is of the form @file{:@var{filename}}, @command{ld}
631will search the library path for a file called @var{filename}, otherise it
632will search the library path for a file called @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}.
252b5132 633
ff5dcc92 634On systems which support shared libraries, @command{ld} may also search for
bcb674cf
RS
635files other than @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. Specifically, on ELF
636and SunOS systems, @command{ld} will search a directory for a library
637called @file{lib@var{namespec}.so} before searching for one called
638@file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. (By convention, a @code{.so} extension
639indicates a shared library.) Note that this behavior does not apply
640to @file{:@var{filename}}, which always specifies a file called
641@var{filename}.
252b5132
RH
642
643The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where it is
644specified on the command line. If the archive defines a symbol which
645was undefined in some object which appeared before the archive on the
646command line, the linker will include the appropriate file(s) from the
647archive. However, an undefined symbol in an object appearing later on
648the command line will not cause the linker to search the archive again.
649
ff5dcc92 650See the @option{-(} option for a way to force the linker to search
252b5132
RH
651archives multiple times.
652
653You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
654
655@ifset GENERIC
656This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers. However,
ff5dcc92 657if you are using @command{ld} on AIX, note that it is different from the
252b5132
RH
658behaviour of the AIX linker.
659@end ifset
660
661@cindex search directory, from cmd line
2509a395 662@kindex -L @var{dir}
252b5132 663@kindex --library-path=@var{dir}
2509a395 664@item -L @var{searchdir}
252b5132 665@itemx --library-path=@var{searchdir}
ff5dcc92
SC
666Add path @var{searchdir} to the list of paths that @command{ld} will search
667for archive libraries and @command{ld} control scripts. You may use this
252b5132
RH
668option any number of times. The directories are searched in the order
669in which they are specified on the command line. Directories specified
670on the command line are searched before the default directories. All
ff5dcc92 671@option{-L} options apply to all @option{-l} options, regardless of the
252b5132
RH
672order in which the options appear.
673
9c8ebd6a
DJ
674If @var{searchdir} begins with @code{=}, then the @code{=} will be replaced
675by the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, a path specified when the linker is configured.
676
252b5132
RH
677@ifset UsesEnvVars
678The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
ff5dcc92 679@samp{-L}) depends on which emulation mode @command{ld} is using, and in
252b5132
RH
680some cases also on how it was configured. @xref{Environment}.
681@end ifset
682
683The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
684@code{SEARCH_DIR} command. Directories specified this way are searched
685at the point in which the linker script appears in the command line.
686
687@cindex emulation
688@kindex -m @var{emulation}
2509a395 689@item -m @var{emulation}
252b5132
RH
690Emulate the @var{emulation} linker. You can list the available
691emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options.
692
693If the @samp{-m} option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
694@code{LDEMULATION} environment variable, if that is defined.
695
696Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
697configured.
698
699@cindex link map
700@kindex -M
701@kindex --print-map
702@item -M
703@itemx --print-map
704Print a link map to the standard output. A link map provides
705information about the link, including the following:
706
707@itemize @bullet
708@item
3b83e13a 709Where object files are mapped into memory.
252b5132
RH
710@item
711How common symbols are allocated.
712@item
713All archive members included in the link, with a mention of the symbol
714which caused the archive member to be brought in.
3b83e13a
NC
715@item
716The values assigned to symbols.
717
718Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression which
719involves a reference to a previous value of the same symbol may not
720have correct result displayed in the link map. This is because the
721linker discards intermediate results and only retains the final value
722of an expression. Under such circumstances the linker will display
723the final value enclosed by square brackets. Thus for example a
724linker script containing:
725
726@smallexample
727 foo = 1
728 foo = foo * 4
729 foo = foo + 8
730@end smallexample
731
732will produce the following output in the link map if the @option{-M}
733option is used:
734
735@smallexample
736 0x00000001 foo = 0x1
737 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo * 0x4)
738 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo + 0x8)
739@end smallexample
740
741See @ref{Expressions} for more information about expressions in linker
742scripts.
252b5132
RH
743@end itemize
744
745@kindex -n
746@cindex read-only text
747@cindex NMAGIC
748@kindex --nmagic
749@item -n
750@itemx --nmagic
fa19fce0 751Turn off page alignment of sections, and mark the output as
a1ab1d2a 752@code{NMAGIC} if possible.
252b5132
RH
753
754@kindex -N
755@kindex --omagic
756@cindex read/write from cmd line
757@cindex OMAGIC
a1ab1d2a 758@item -N
252b5132
RH
759@itemx --omagic
760Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable. Also, do
63fd3b82
NC
761not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against shared
762libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
4d8907ac
DS
763mark the output as @code{OMAGIC}. Note: Although a writable text section
764is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform to the format
765specification published by Microsoft.
63fd3b82
NC
766
767@kindex --no-omagic
768@cindex OMAGIC
769@item --no-omagic
770This option negates most of the effects of the @option{-N} option. It
771sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment to
772be page-aligned. Note - this option does not enable linking against
773shared libraries. Use @option{-Bdynamic} for this.
252b5132
RH
774
775@kindex -o @var{output}
776@kindex --output=@var{output}
777@cindex naming the output file
778@item -o @var{output}
779@itemx --output=@var{output}
ff5dcc92 780Use @var{output} as the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; if this
252b5132
RH
781option is not specified, the name @file{a.out} is used by default. The
782script command @code{OUTPUT} can also specify the output file name.
783
784@kindex -O @var{level}
785@cindex generating optimized output
786@item -O @var{level}
ff5dcc92 787If @var{level} is a numeric values greater than zero @command{ld} optimizes
252b5132 788the output. This might take significantly longer and therefore probably
98c503ac
NC
789should only be enabled for the final binary. At the moment this
790option only affects ELF shared library generation. Future releases of
791the linker may make more use of this option. Also currently there is
792no difference in the linker's behaviour for different non-zero values
793of this option. Again this may change with future releases.
252b5132 794
a712da20
NC
795@kindex -q
796@kindex --emit-relocs
797@cindex retain relocations in final executable
798@item -q
799@itemx --emit-relocs
ba1be17e 800Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked executables.
a712da20
NC
801Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this information in
802order to perform correct modifications of executables. This results
803in larger executables.
804
dbab7a7b
NC
805This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
806
4f471f39
RS
807@kindex --force-dynamic
808@cindex forcing the creation of dynamic sections
809@item --force-dynamic
810Force the output file to have dynamic sections. This option is specific
811to VxWorks targets.
812
252b5132
RH
813@cindex partial link
814@cindex relocatable output
815@kindex -r
1049f94e 816@kindex --relocatable
252b5132 817@item -r
1049f94e 818@itemx --relocatable
252b5132 819Generate relocatable output---i.e., generate an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 820turn serve as input to @command{ld}. This is often called @dfn{partial
252b5132
RH
821linking}. As a side effect, in environments that support standard Unix
822magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic number to
823@code{OMAGIC}.
ff5dcc92 824@c ; see @option{-N}.
252b5132
RH
825If this option is not specified, an absolute file is produced. When
826linking C++ programs, this option @emph{will not} resolve references to
827constructors; to do that, use @samp{-Ur}.
828
62bf86b4
HPN
829When an input file does not have the same format as the output file,
830partial linking is only supported if that input file does not contain any
831relocations. Different output formats can have further restrictions; for
832example some @code{a.out}-based formats do not support partial linking
833with input files in other formats at all.
834
252b5132
RH
835This option does the same thing as @samp{-i}.
836
837@kindex -R @var{file}
838@kindex --just-symbols=@var{file}
839@cindex symbol-only input
840@item -R @var{filename}
841@itemx --just-symbols=@var{filename}
842Read symbol names and their addresses from @var{filename}, but do not
843relocate it or include it in the output. This allows your output file
844to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined in other
845programs. You may use this option more than once.
846
ff5dcc92 847For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 848followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 849the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
850
851@kindex -s
852@kindex --strip-all
853@cindex strip all symbols
a1ab1d2a 854@item -s
252b5132
RH
855@itemx --strip-all
856Omit all symbol information from the output file.
857
858@kindex -S
859@kindex --strip-debug
860@cindex strip debugger symbols
a1ab1d2a 861@item -S
252b5132
RH
862@itemx --strip-debug
863Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the output file.
864
865@kindex -t
866@kindex --trace
867@cindex input files, displaying
a1ab1d2a 868@item -t
252b5132 869@itemx --trace
ff5dcc92 870Print the names of the input files as @command{ld} processes them.
252b5132
RH
871
872@kindex -T @var{script}
873@kindex --script=@var{script}
874@cindex script files
875@item -T @var{scriptfile}
876@itemx --script=@var{scriptfile}
877Use @var{scriptfile} as the linker script. This script replaces
ff5dcc92 878@command{ld}'s default linker script (rather than adding to it), so
252b5132 879@var{commandfile} must specify everything necessary to describe the
114283d8
NC
880output file. @xref{Scripts}. If @var{scriptfile} does not exist in
881the current directory, @code{ld} looks for it in the directories
882specified by any preceding @samp{-L} options. Multiple @samp{-T}
883options accumulate.
252b5132 884
14be8564
L
885@kindex -dT @var{script}
886@kindex --default-script=@var{script}
887@cindex script files
888@item -dT @var{scriptfile}
889@itemx --default-script=@var{scriptfile}
890Use @var{scriptfile} as the default linker script. @xref{Scripts}.
891
892This option is similar to the @option{--script} option except that
893processing of the script is delayed until after the rest of the
894command line has been processed. This allows options placed after the
895@option{--default-script} option on the command line to affect the
896behaviour of the linker script, which can be important when the linker
897command line cannot be directly controlled by the user. (eg because
898the command line is being constructed by another tool, such as
899@samp{gcc}).
900
252b5132
RH
901@kindex -u @var{symbol}
902@kindex --undefined=@var{symbol}
903@cindex undefined symbol
904@item -u @var{symbol}
905@itemx --undefined=@var{symbol}
906Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
907symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
908modules from standard libraries. @samp{-u} may be repeated with
909different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols. This
910option is equivalent to the @code{EXTERN} linker script command.
911
912@kindex -Ur
913@cindex constructors
a1ab1d2a 914@item -Ur
252b5132
RH
915For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
916@samp{-r}: it generates relocatable output---i.e., an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 917turn serve as input to @command{ld}. When linking C++ programs, @samp{-Ur}
252b5132
RH
918@emph{does} resolve references to constructors, unlike @samp{-r}.
919It does not work to use @samp{-Ur} on files that were themselves linked
920with @samp{-Ur}; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot
921be added to. Use @samp{-Ur} only for the last partial link, and
922@samp{-r} for the others.
923
577a0623
AM
924@kindex --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
925@item --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
926Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
927@var{SECTION}, or if the optional wildcard @var{SECTION} argument is
928missing, for every orphan input section. An orphan section is one not
929specifically mentioned in a linker script. You may use this option
930multiple times on the command line; It prevents the normal merging of
931input sections with the same name, overriding output section assignments
932in a linker script.
a854a4a7 933
252b5132
RH
934@kindex -v
935@kindex -V
936@kindex --version
937@cindex version
938@item -v
939@itemx --version
940@itemx -V
ff5dcc92 941Display the version number for @command{ld}. The @option{-V} option also
252b5132
RH
942lists the supported emulations.
943
944@kindex -x
945@kindex --discard-all
946@cindex deleting local symbols
947@item -x
948@itemx --discard-all
949Delete all local symbols.
950
951@kindex -X
952@kindex --discard-locals
953@cindex local symbols, deleting
a1ab1d2a 954@item -X
252b5132 955@itemx --discard-locals
3c68c38f
BW
956Delete all temporary local symbols. (These symbols start with
957system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
958or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.)
252b5132
RH
959
960@kindex -y @var{symbol}
961@kindex --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
962@cindex symbol tracing
963@item -y @var{symbol}
964@itemx --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
965Print the name of each linked file in which @var{symbol} appears. This
966option may be given any number of times. On many systems it is necessary
967to prepend an underscore.
968
969This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your link but
970don't know where the reference is coming from.
971
972@kindex -Y @var{path}
973@item -Y @var{path}
974Add @var{path} to the default library search path. This option exists
975for Solaris compatibility.
976
977@kindex -z @var{keyword}
978@item -z @var{keyword}
cd6d6c15
NC
979The recognized keywords are:
980@table @samp
981
982@item combreloc
983Combines multiple reloc sections and sorts them to make dynamic symbol
984lookup caching possible.
985
986@item defs
560e09e9 987Disallows undefined symbols in object files. Undefined symbols in
07f3b6ad 988shared libraries are still allowed.
cd6d6c15 989
6aa29e7b
JJ
990@item execstack
991Marks the object as requiring executable stack.
992
cd6d6c15
NC
993@item initfirst
994This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
995It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will occur
996before the runtime initialization of any other objects brought into
997the process at the same time. Similarly the runtime finalization of
998the object will occur after the runtime finalization of any other
999objects.
1000
1001@item interpose
1002Marks the object that its symbol table interposes before all symbols
1003but the primary executable.
1004
5fa222e4
AM
1005@item lazy
1006When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1007dynamic linker to defer function call resolution to the point when
1008the function is called (lazy binding), rather than at load time.
1009Lazy binding is the default.
1010
cd6d6c15
NC
1011@item loadfltr
1012Marks the object that its filters be processed immediately at
1013runtime.
1014
1015@item muldefs
1016Allows multiple definitions.
1017
1018@item nocombreloc
1019Disables multiple reloc sections combining.
1020
1021@item nocopyreloc
1022Disables production of copy relocs.
1023
1024@item nodefaultlib
1025Marks the object that the search for dependencies of this object will
1026ignore any default library search paths.
1027
1028@item nodelete
1029Marks the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
1030
1031@item nodlopen
1032Marks the object not available to @code{dlopen}.
1033
1034@item nodump
1035Marks the object can not be dumped by @code{dldump}.
1036
6aa29e7b
JJ
1037@item noexecstack
1038Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.
1039
1040@item norelro
1041Don't create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1042
cd6d6c15
NC
1043@item now
1044When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1045dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the program is started, or
1046when the shared library is linked to using dlopen, instead of
1047deferring function call resolution to the point when the function is
1048first called.
1049
1050@item origin
1051Marks the object may contain $ORIGIN.
1052
6aa29e7b
JJ
1053@item relro
1054Create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1055
24718e3b
L
1056@item max-page-size=@var{value}
1057Set the emulation maximum page size to @var{value}.
1058
1059@item common-page-size=@var{value}
1060Set the emulation common page size to @var{value}.
1061
cd6d6c15
NC
1062@end table
1063
ece2d90e 1064Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
252b5132
RH
1065
1066@kindex -(
1067@cindex groups of archives
1068@item -( @var{archives} -)
1069@itemx --start-group @var{archives} --end-group
1070The @var{archives} should be a list of archive files. They may be
1071either explicit file names, or @samp{-l} options.
1072
1073The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new undefined
1074references are created. Normally, an archive is searched only once in
1075the order that it is specified on the command line. If a symbol in that
1076archive is needed to resolve an undefined symbol referred to by an
1077object in an archive that appears later on the command line, the linker
1078would not be able to resolve that reference. By grouping the archives,
1079they all be searched repeatedly until all possible references are
1080resolved.
1081
1082Using this option has a significant performance cost. It is best to use
1083it only when there are unavoidable circular references between two or
1084more archives.
1085
69da35b5
NC
1086@kindex --accept-unknown-input-arch
1087@kindex --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1088@item --accept-unknown-input-arch
1089@itemx --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1090Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
2ca22b03 1091recognised. The assumption is that the user knows what they are doing
69da35b5
NC
1092and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files. This was
1093the default behaviour of the linker, before release 2.14. The default
1094behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to reject such input files, and
1095so the @samp{--accept-unknown-input-arch} option has been added to
1096restore the old behaviour.
2ca22b03 1097
4a43e768
AM
1098@kindex --as-needed
1099@kindex --no-as-needed
1100@item --as-needed
1101@itemx --no-as-needed
1102This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries mentioned
1103on the command line after the @option{--as-needed} option. Normally,
1104the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library mentioned
1105on the command line, regardless of whether the library is actually
010e5ae2
AM
1106needed. @option{--as-needed} causes a DT_NEEDED tag to only be emitted
1107for a library that satisfies a symbol reference from regular objects
1108which is undefined at the point that the library was linked, or, if
1109the library is not found in the DT_NEEDED lists of other libraries
1110linked up to that point, a reference from another dynamic library.
4a43e768
AM
1111@option{--no-as-needed} restores the default behaviour.
1112
e56f61be
L
1113@kindex --add-needed
1114@kindex --no-add-needed
1115@item --add-needed
1116@itemx --no-add-needed
1117This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries from ELF
1118DT_NEEDED tags in dynamic libraries mentioned on the command line after
1119the @option{--no-add-needed} option. Normally, the linker will add
1120a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library from DT_NEEDED tags.
1121@option{--no-add-needed} causes DT_NEEDED tags will never be emitted
1122for those libraries from DT_NEEDED tags. @option{--add-needed} restores
1123the default behaviour.
1124
252b5132
RH
1125@kindex -assert @var{keyword}
1126@item -assert @var{keyword}
1127This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
1128
1129@kindex -Bdynamic
1130@kindex -dy
1131@kindex -call_shared
1132@item -Bdynamic
1133@itemx -dy
1134@itemx -call_shared
1135Link against dynamic libraries. This is only meaningful on platforms
1136for which shared libraries are supported. This option is normally the
1137default on such platforms. The different variants of this option are
1138for compatibility with various systems. You may use this option
1139multiple times on the command line: it affects library searching for
da8bce14 1140@option{-l} options which follow it.
252b5132 1141
a1ab1d2a
UD
1142@kindex -Bgroup
1143@item -Bgroup
1144Set the @code{DF_1_GROUP} flag in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} entry in the dynamic
1145section. This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
1146object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
560e09e9
NC
1147@option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all} is implied. This option is
1148only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
a1ab1d2a 1149
252b5132
RH
1150@kindex -Bstatic
1151@kindex -dn
1152@kindex -non_shared
1153@kindex -static
a1ab1d2a 1154@item -Bstatic
252b5132
RH
1155@itemx -dn
1156@itemx -non_shared
1157@itemx -static
1158Do not link against shared libraries. This is only meaningful on
1159platforms for which shared libraries are supported. The different
1160variants of this option are for compatibility with various systems. You
1161may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
560e09e9 1162library searching for @option{-l} options which follow it. This
e9156f74
NC
1163option also implies @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all}. This
1164option can be used with @option{-shared}. Doing so means that a
1165shared library is being created but that all of the library's external
1166references must be resolved by pulling in entries from static
ece2d90e 1167libraries.
252b5132
RH
1168
1169@kindex -Bsymbolic
1170@item -Bsymbolic
1171When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols to the
1172definition within the shared library, if any. Normally, it is possible
1173for a program linked against a shared library to override the definition
1174within the shared library. This option is only meaningful on ELF
1175platforms which support shared libraries.
1176
40b36307
L
1177@kindex -Bsymbolic-functions
1178@item -Bsymbolic-functions
1179When creating a shared library, bind references to global function
c0065db7 1180symbols to the definition within the shared library, if any.
40b36307
L
1181This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared
1182libraries.
1183
55255dae
L
1184@kindex --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1185@item --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1186Specify the name of a dynamic list file to the linker. This is
1187typically used when creating shared libraries to specify a list of
1188global symbols whose references shouldn't be bound to the definition
1189within the shared library, or creating dynamically linked executables
1190to specify a list of symbols which should be added to the symbol table
1191in the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms
1192which support shared libraries.
1193
1194The format of the dynamic list is the same as the version node without
1195scope and node name. See @ref{VERSION} for more information.
1196
40b36307
L
1197@kindex --dynamic-list-data
1198@item --dynamic-list-data
1199Include all global data symbols to the dynamic list.
1200
1201@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1202@item --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1203Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ operator new and delete. It
1204is mainly useful for building shared libstdc++.
1205
0b8a70d9
L
1206@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1207@item --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1208Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ runtime type identification.
1209
252b5132
RH
1210@kindex --check-sections
1211@kindex --no-check-sections
1212@item --check-sections
308b1ffd 1213@itemx --no-check-sections
252b5132 1214Asks the linker @emph{not} to check section addresses after they have
7d816a17 1215been assigned to see if there are any overlaps. Normally the linker will
252b5132
RH
1216perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it will produce
1217suitable error messages. The linker does know about, and does make
1218allowances for sections in overlays. The default behaviour can be
560e09e9 1219restored by using the command line switch @option{--check-sections}.
02b0b1aa
NS
1220Section overlap is not usually checked for relocatable links. You can
1221force checking in that case by using the @option{--check-sections}
1222option.
252b5132
RH
1223
1224@cindex cross reference table
1225@kindex --cref
1226@item --cref
1227Output a cross reference table. If a linker map file is being
1228generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
1229Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
1230
1231The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
1232easily processed by a script if necessary. The symbols are printed out,
1233sorted by name. For each symbol, a list of file names is given. If the
1234symbol is defined, the first file listed is the location of the
1235definition. The remaining files contain references to the symbol.
1236
4818e05f
AM
1237@cindex common allocation
1238@kindex --no-define-common
1239@item --no-define-common
1240This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
1241The script command @code{INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
1242@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1243
1244The @samp{--no-define-common} option allows decoupling
1245the decision to assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice
1246of the output file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type
1247forces assigning addresses to Common symbols.
1248Using @samp{--no-define-common} allows Common symbols that are referenced
1249from a shared library to be assigned addresses only in the main program.
1250This eliminates the unused duplicate space in the shared library,
1251and also prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
1252duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized search
1253paths for runtime symbol resolution.
1254
252b5132 1255@cindex symbols, from command line
2509a395
SL
1256@kindex --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{exp}
1257@item --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{expression}
252b5132
RH
1258Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
1259address given by @var{expression}. You may use this option as many
1260times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line. A
1261limited form of arithmetic is supported for the @var{expression} in this
1262context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of an existing
1263symbol, or use @code{+} and @code{-} to add or subtract hexadecimal
1264constants or symbols. If you need more elaborate expressions, consider
1265using the linker command language from a script (@pxref{Assignments,,
1266Assignment: Symbol Definitions}). @emph{Note:} there should be no white
1267space between @var{symbol}, the equals sign (``@key{=}''), and
1268@var{expression}.
1269
1270@cindex demangling, from command line
28c309a2 1271@kindex --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132 1272@kindex --no-demangle
28c309a2 1273@item --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132
RH
1274@itemx --no-demangle
1275These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error messages
1276and other output. When the linker is told to demangle, it tries to
1277present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips leading
1278underscores if they are used by the object file format, and converts C++
a1ab1d2a
UD
1279mangled symbol names into user readable names. Different compilers have
1280different mangling styles. The optional demangling style argument can be used
1281to choose an appropriate demangling style for your compiler. The linker will
28c309a2
NC
1282demangle by default unless the environment variable @samp{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}
1283is set. These options may be used to override the default.
252b5132
RH
1284
1285@cindex dynamic linker, from command line
506eee22 1286@kindex -I@var{file}
2509a395
SL
1287@kindex --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1288@item -I@var{file}
1289@itemx --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
252b5132
RH
1290Set the name of the dynamic linker. This is only meaningful when
1291generating dynamically linked ELF executables. The default dynamic
1292linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what you are
1293doing.
1294
7ce691ae 1295@kindex --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd 1296@kindex --no-fatal-warnings
7ce691ae 1297@item --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd
NC
1298@itemx --no-fatal-warnings
1299Treat all warnings as errors. The default behaviour can be restored
1300with the option @option{--no-fatal-warnings}.
7ce691ae 1301
252b5132
RH
1302@kindex --force-exe-suffix
1303@item --force-exe-suffix
1304Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
1305
1306If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
1307@code{.exe} or @code{.dll} suffix, this option forces the linker to copy
1308the output file to one of the same name with a @code{.exe} suffix. This
1309option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a Microsoft
1310Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run an image unless
1311it ends in a @code{.exe} suffix.
1312
1313@kindex --gc-sections
1314@kindex --no-gc-sections
1315@cindex garbage collection
c17d87de
NC
1316@item --gc-sections
1317@itemx --no-gc-sections
252b5132 1318Enable garbage collection of unused input sections. It is ignored on
ac69cbc6 1319targets that do not support this option. The default behaviour (of not
b3549761
NC
1320performing this garbage collection) can be restored by specifying
1321@samp{--no-gc-sections} on the command line.
252b5132 1322
d5465ba2
AM
1323@samp{--gc-sections} decides which input sections are used by
1324examining symbols and relocations. The section containing the entry
1325symbol and all sections containing symbols undefined on the
1326command-line will be kept, as will sections containing symbols
1327referenced by dynamic objects. Note that when building shared
1328libraries, the linker must assume that any visible symbol is
1329referenced. Once this initial set of sections has been determined,
1330the linker recursively marks as used any section referenced by their
1331relocations. See @samp{--entry} and @samp{--undefined}.
1332
ac69cbc6
TG
1333This option can be set when doing a partial link (enabled with option
1334@samp{-r}). In this case the root of symbols kept must be explicitely
1335specified either by an @samp{--entry} or @samp{--undefined} option or by
1336a @code{ENTRY} command in the linker script.
1337
c17d87de
NC
1338@kindex --print-gc-sections
1339@kindex --no-print-gc-sections
1340@cindex garbage collection
1341@item --print-gc-sections
1342@itemx --no-print-gc-sections
1343List all sections removed by garbage collection. The listing is
1344printed on stderr. This option is only effective if garbage
1345collection has been enabled via the @samp{--gc-sections}) option. The
1346default behaviour (of not listing the sections that are removed) can
1347be restored by specifying @samp{--no-print-gc-sections} on the command
1348line.
1349
252b5132
RH
1350@cindex help
1351@cindex usage
1352@kindex --help
1353@item --help
1354Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output and exit.
1355
ea20a7da
CC
1356@kindex --target-help
1357@item --target-help
1358Print a summary of all target specific options on the standard output and exit.
1359
2509a395
SL
1360@kindex -Map=@var{mapfile}
1361@item -Map=@var{mapfile}
252b5132 1362Print a link map to the file @var{mapfile}. See the description of the
560e09e9 1363@option{-M} option, above.
252b5132
RH
1364
1365@cindex memory usage
1366@kindex --no-keep-memory
1367@item --no-keep-memory
ff5dcc92
SC
1368@command{ld} normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
1369symbol tables of input files in memory. This option tells @command{ld} to
252b5132 1370instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables as
ff5dcc92 1371necessary. This may be required if @command{ld} runs out of memory space
252b5132
RH
1372while linking a large executable.
1373
1374@kindex --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1375@kindex -z defs
252b5132 1376@item --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1377@itemx -z defs
560e09e9
NC
1378Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1379is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1380The switch @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} controls the
1381behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
ece2d90e 1382libraries being linked in.
252b5132 1383
aa713662
L
1384@kindex --allow-multiple-definition
1385@kindex -z muldefs
1386@item --allow-multiple-definition
1387@itemx -z muldefs
1388Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
1389report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and the
1390first definition will be used.
1391
b79e8c78 1392@kindex --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1393@kindex --no-allow-shlib-undefined
b79e8c78 1394@item --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1395@itemx --no-allow-shlib-undefined
903249d7 1396Allows or disallows undefined symbols in shared libraries.
560e09e9
NC
1397This switch is similar to @option{--no-undefined} except that it
1398determines the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a
1399shared library rather than a regular object file. It does not affect
1400how undefined symbols in regular object files are handled.
1401
903249d7
NC
1402The default behaviour is to report errors for any undefined symbols
1403referenced in shared libraries if the linker is being used to create
1404an executable, but to allow them if the linker is being used to create
1405a shared library.
1406
1407The reasons for allowing undefined symbol references in shared
1408libraries specified at link time are that:
1409
1410@itemize @bullet
1411@item
1412A shared library specified at link time may not be the same as the one
1413that is available at load time, so the symbol might actually be
1414resolvable at load time.
1415@item
1416There are some operating systems, eg BeOS and HPPA, where undefined
1417symbols in shared libraries are normal.
1418
1419The BeOS kernel for example patches shared libraries at load time to
1420select whichever function is most appropriate for the current
1421architecture. This is used, for example, to dynamically select an
1422appropriate memset function.
1423@end itemize
b79e8c78 1424
31941635
L
1425@kindex --no-undefined-version
1426@item --no-undefined-version
1427Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will ignore
1428it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version and a fatal error
1429will be issued instead.
1430
3e3b46e5
PB
1431@kindex --default-symver
1432@item --default-symver
1433Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
fc0e6df6
PB
1434exported symbols.
1435
1436@kindex --default-imported-symver
1437@item --default-imported-symver
1438Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1439imported symbols.
3e3b46e5 1440
252b5132
RH
1441@kindex --no-warn-mismatch
1442@item --no-warn-mismatch
ff5dcc92 1443Normally @command{ld} will give an error if you try to link together input
252b5132
RH
1444files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they have
1445been compiled for different processors or for different endiannesses.
ff5dcc92 1446This option tells @command{ld} that it should silently permit such possible
252b5132
RH
1447errors. This option should only be used with care, in cases when you
1448have taken some special action that ensures that the linker errors are
1449inappropriate.
1450
fe7929ce
AM
1451@kindex --no-warn-search-mismatch
1452@item --no-warn-search-mismatch
1453Normally @command{ld} will give a warning if it finds an incompatible
1454library during a library search. This option silences the warning.
1455
252b5132
RH
1456@kindex --no-whole-archive
1457@item --no-whole-archive
ff5dcc92 1458Turn off the effect of the @option{--whole-archive} option for subsequent
252b5132
RH
1459archive files.
1460
1461@cindex output file after errors
1462@kindex --noinhibit-exec
1463@item --noinhibit-exec
1464Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
1465Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it encounters
1466errors during the link process; it exits without writing an output file
1467when it issues any error whatsoever.
1468
0a9c1c8e
CD
1469@kindex -nostdlib
1470@item -nostdlib
1471Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
1472command line. Library directories specified in linker scripts
1473(including linker scripts specified on the command line) are ignored.
1474
252b5132 1475@ifclear SingleFormat
2509a395
SL
1476@kindex --oformat=@var{output-format}
1477@item --oformat=@var{output-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
1478@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
1479file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 1480@samp{--oformat} option to specify the binary format for the output
ff5dcc92
SC
1481object file. Even when @command{ld} is configured to support alternative
1482object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
1483should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
1484usual format on each machine. @var{output-format} is a text string, the
1485name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries. (You can
1486list the available binary formats with @samp{objdump -i}.) The script
1487command @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} can also specify the output format, but
1488this option overrides it. @xref{BFD}.
1489@end ifclear
1490
36af4a4e
JJ
1491@kindex -pie
1492@kindex --pic-executable
1493@item -pie
1494@itemx --pic-executable
1495@cindex position independent executables
1496Create a position independent executable. This is currently only supported on
1497ELF platforms. Position independent executables are similar to shared
1498libraries in that they are relocated by the dynamic linker to the virtual
7e7d5768 1499address the OS chooses for them (which can vary between invocations). Like
36af4a4e
JJ
1500normal dynamically linked executables they can be executed and symbols
1501defined in the executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
1502
252b5132
RH
1503@kindex -qmagic
1504@item -qmagic
1505This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
1506
1507@kindex -Qy
1508@item -Qy
1509This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
1510
1511@kindex --relax
1512@cindex synthesizing linker
1513@cindex relaxing addressing modes
1514@item --relax
a1ab1d2a 1515An option with machine dependent effects.
252b5132
RH
1516@ifset GENERIC
1517This option is only supported on a few targets.
1518@end ifset
1519@ifset H8300
ff5dcc92 1520@xref{H8/300,,@command{ld} and the H8/300}.
252b5132
RH
1521@end ifset
1522@ifset I960
ff5dcc92 1523@xref{i960,, @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family}.
252b5132 1524@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
1525@ifset XTENSA
1526@xref{Xtensa,, @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors}.
1527@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
1528@ifset M68HC11
1529@xref{M68HC11/68HC12,,@command{ld} and the 68HC11 and 68HC12}.
1530@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
1531@ifset POWERPC
1532@xref{PowerPC ELF32,,@command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support}.
1533@end ifset
252b5132
RH
1534
1535On some platforms, the @samp{--relax} option performs global
1536optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves addressing
1537in the program, such as relaxing address modes and synthesizing new
1538instructions in the output object file.
1539
1540On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make symbolic
1541debugging of the resulting executable impossible.
1542@ifset GENERIC
1543This is known to be
1544the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300 family of processors.
1545@end ifset
1546
1547@ifset GENERIC
1548On platforms where this is not supported, @samp{--relax} is accepted,
1549but ignored.
1550@end ifset
1551
1552@cindex retaining specified symbols
1553@cindex stripping all but some symbols
1554@cindex symbols, retaining selectively
2509a395
SL
1555@kindex --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1556@item --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
252b5132
RH
1557Retain @emph{only} the symbols listed in the file @var{filename},
1558discarding all others. @var{filename} is simply a flat file, with one
1559symbol name per line. This option is especially useful in environments
1560@ifset GENERIC
1561(such as VxWorks)
1562@end ifset
1563where a large global symbol table is accumulated gradually, to conserve
1564run-time memory.
1565
1566@samp{--retain-symbols-file} does @emph{not} discard undefined symbols,
1567or symbols needed for relocations.
1568
1569You may only specify @samp{--retain-symbols-file} once in the command
1570line. It overrides @samp{-s} and @samp{-S}.
1571
1572@ifset GENERIC
2509a395 1573@item -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1574@cindex runtime library search path
2509a395 1575@kindex -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1576Add a directory to the runtime library search path. This is used when
ff5dcc92 1577linking an ELF executable with shared objects. All @option{-rpath}
252b5132 1578arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which uses
ff5dcc92 1579them to locate shared objects at runtime. The @option{-rpath} option is
252b5132
RH
1580also used when locating shared objects which are needed by shared
1581objects explicitly included in the link; see the description of the
ff5dcc92 1582@option{-rpath-link} option. If @option{-rpath} is not used when linking an
252b5132
RH
1583ELF executable, the contents of the environment variable
1584@code{LD_RUN_PATH} will be used if it is defined.
1585
ff5dcc92 1586The @option{-rpath} option may also be used on SunOS. By default, on
252b5132 1587SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search patch out of all the
ff5dcc92
SC
1588@option{-L} options it is given. If a @option{-rpath} option is used, the
1589runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the @option{-rpath}
1590options, ignoring the @option{-L} options. This can be useful when using
1591gcc, which adds many @option{-L} options which may be on NFS mounted
b45619c0 1592file systems.
252b5132 1593
ff5dcc92 1594For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 1595followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 1596the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
1597@end ifset
1598
1599@ifset GENERIC
1600@cindex link-time runtime library search path
2509a395
SL
1601@kindex -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1602@item -rpath-link=@var{dir}
252b5132
RH
1603When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another. This
1604happens when an @code{ld -shared} link includes a shared library as one
1605of the input files.
1606
1607When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a non-shared,
1608non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to locate the required
1609shared library and include it in the link, if it is not included
ff5dcc92 1610explicitly. In such a case, the @option{-rpath-link} option
252b5132 1611specifies the first set of directories to search. The
ff5dcc92 1612@option{-rpath-link} option may specify a sequence of directory names
252b5132
RH
1613either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
1614appearing multiple times.
1615
28c309a2
NC
1616This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search path
1617that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In such a case it
1618is possible to use unintentionally a different search path than the
1619runtime linker would do.
1620
252b5132 1621The linker uses the following search paths to locate required shared
ece2d90e 1622libraries:
252b5132
RH
1623@enumerate
1624@item
ff5dcc92 1625Any directories specified by @option{-rpath-link} options.
252b5132 1626@item
ff5dcc92
SC
1627Any directories specified by @option{-rpath} options. The difference
1628between @option{-rpath} and @option{-rpath-link} is that directories
1629specified by @option{-rpath} options are included in the executable and
1630used at runtime, whereas the @option{-rpath-link} option is only effective
ece2d90e
NC
1631at link time. Searching @option{-rpath} in this way is only supported
1632by native linkers and cross linkers which have been configured with
1633the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
252b5132 1634@item
e2a83dd0
NC
1635On an ELF system, for native linkers, if the @option{-rpath} and
1636@option{-rpath-link} options were not used, search the contents of the
1637environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH}.
252b5132 1638@item
ff5dcc92
SC
1639On SunOS, if the @option{-rpath} option was not used, search any
1640directories specified using @option{-L} options.
252b5132 1641@item
e2a83dd0
NC
1642For a native linker, the search the contents of the environment
1643variable @code{LD_LIBRARY_PATH}.
252b5132 1644@item
ec4eb78a
L
1645For a native ELF linker, the directories in @code{DT_RUNPATH} or
1646@code{DT_RPATH} of a shared library are searched for shared
1647libraries needed by it. The @code{DT_RPATH} entries are ignored if
1648@code{DT_RUNPATH} entries exist.
1649@item
252b5132
RH
1650The default directories, normally @file{/lib} and @file{/usr/lib}.
1651@item
1652For a native linker on an ELF system, if the file @file{/etc/ld.so.conf}
1653exists, the list of directories found in that file.
1654@end enumerate
1655
1656If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue a
1657warning and continue with the link.
1658@end ifset
1659
1660@kindex -shared
1661@kindex -Bshareable
1662@item -shared
1663@itemx -Bshareable
1664@cindex shared libraries
1665Create a shared library. This is currently only supported on ELF, XCOFF
1666and SunOS platforms. On SunOS, the linker will automatically create a
ff5dcc92 1667shared library if the @option{-e} option is not used and there are
252b5132
RH
1668undefined symbols in the link.
1669
252b5132 1670@kindex --sort-common
2509a395
SL
1671@item --sort-common
1672@itemx --sort-common=ascending
1673@itemx --sort-common=descending
de7dd2bd
NC
1674This option tells @command{ld} to sort the common symbols by alignment in
1675ascending or descending order when it places them in the appropriate output
1676sections. The symbol alignments considered are sixteen-byte or larger,
1677eight-byte, four-byte, two-byte, and one-byte. This is to prevent gaps
1678between symbols due to alignment constraints. If no sorting order is
1679specified, then descending order is assumed.
252b5132 1680
2509a395
SL
1681@kindex --sort-section=name
1682@item --sort-section=name
bcaa7b3e
L
1683This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_NAME} to all wildcard section
1684patterns in the linker script.
1685
2509a395
SL
1686@kindex --sort-section=alignment
1687@item --sort-section=alignment
bcaa7b3e
L
1688This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} to all wildcard section
1689patterns in the linker script.
1690
252b5132 1691@kindex --split-by-file
2509a395 1692@item --split-by-file[=@var{size}]
ff5dcc92 1693Similar to @option{--split-by-reloc} but creates a new output section for
a854a4a7
AM
1694each input file when @var{size} is reached. @var{size} defaults to a
1695size of 1 if not given.
252b5132
RH
1696
1697@kindex --split-by-reloc
2509a395 1698@item --split-by-reloc[=@var{count}]
a854a4a7 1699Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no single
252b5132 1700output section in the file contains more than @var{count} relocations.
a854a4a7 1701This is useful when generating huge relocatable files for downloading into
252b5132
RH
1702certain real time kernels with the COFF object file format; since COFF
1703cannot represent more than 65535 relocations in a single section. Note
1704that this will fail to work with object file formats which do not
1705support arbitrary sections. The linker will not split up individual
1706input sections for redistribution, so if a single input section contains
1707more than @var{count} relocations one output section will contain that
a854a4a7 1708many relocations. @var{count} defaults to a value of 32768.
252b5132
RH
1709
1710@kindex --stats
1711@item --stats
1712Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker, such
1713as execution time and memory usage.
1714
2509a395 1715@kindex --sysroot=@var{directory}
e2243057
RS
1716@item --sysroot=@var{directory}
1717Use @var{directory} as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
1718configure-time default. This option is only supported by linkers
1719that were configured using @option{--with-sysroot}.
1720
252b5132
RH
1721@kindex --traditional-format
1722@cindex traditional format
1723@item --traditional-format
ff5dcc92
SC
1724For some targets, the output of @command{ld} is different in some ways from
1725the output of some existing linker. This switch requests @command{ld} to
252b5132
RH
1726use the traditional format instead.
1727
1728@cindex dbx
ff5dcc92 1729For example, on SunOS, @command{ld} combines duplicate entries in the
252b5132
RH
1730symbol string table. This can reduce the size of an output file with
1731full debugging information by over 30 percent. Unfortunately, the SunOS
1732@code{dbx} program can not read the resulting program (@code{gdb} has no
ff5dcc92 1733trouble). The @samp{--traditional-format} switch tells @command{ld} to not
252b5132
RH
1734combine duplicate entries.
1735
2509a395
SL
1736@kindex --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
1737@item --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
176355da
NC
1738Locate a section in the output file at the absolute
1739address given by @var{org}. You may use this option as many
1740times as necessary to locate multiple sections in the command
1741line.
1742@var{org} must be a single hexadecimal integer;
1743for compatibility with other linkers, you may omit the leading
1744@samp{0x} usually associated with hexadecimal values. @emph{Note:} there
1745should be no white space between @var{sectionname}, the equals
1746sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{org}.
1747
2509a395
SL
1748@kindex -Tbss=@var{org}
1749@kindex -Tdata=@var{org}
1750@kindex -Ttext=@var{org}
252b5132 1751@cindex segment origins, cmd line
2509a395
SL
1752@item -Tbss=@var{org}
1753@itemx -Tdata=@var{org}
1754@itemx -Ttext=@var{org}
1755Same as @option{--section-start}, with @code{.bss}, @code{.data} or
a6e02871 1756@code{.text} as the @var{sectionname}.
252b5132 1757
2509a395
SL
1758@kindex -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
1759@item -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
258795f5
L
1760@cindex text segment origin, cmd line
1761When creating an ELF executable or shared object, it will set the address
1762of the first byte of the text segment.
1763
560e09e9
NC
1764@kindex --unresolved-symbols
1765@item --unresolved-symbols=@var{method}
1766Determine how to handle unresolved symbols. There are four possible
1767values for @samp{method}:
1768
1769@table @samp
1770@item ignore-all
da8bce14 1771Do not report any unresolved symbols.
560e09e9
NC
1772
1773@item report-all
da8bce14 1774Report all unresolved symbols. This is the default.
560e09e9
NC
1775
1776@item ignore-in-object-files
1777Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared libraries, but
1778ignore them if they come from regular object files.
1779
1780@item ignore-in-shared-libs
1781Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object files, but
1782ignore them if they come from shared libraries. This can be useful
1783when creating a dynamic binary and it is known that all the shared
1784libraries that it should be referencing are included on the linker's
1785command line.
1786@end table
1787
1788The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be controlled
1789by the @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} option.
1790
1791Normally the linker will generate an error message for each reported
1792unresolved symbol but the option @option{--warn-unresolved-symbols}
1793can change this to a warning.
1794
252b5132
RH
1795@kindex --verbose
1796@cindex verbose
1797@item --dll-verbose
308b1ffd 1798@itemx --verbose
ff5dcc92 1799Display the version number for @command{ld} and list the linker emulations
252b5132 1800supported. Display which input files can and cannot be opened. Display
b9a8de1e 1801the linker script being used by the linker.
252b5132
RH
1802
1803@kindex --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
1804@cindex version script, symbol versions
2509a395 1805@item --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
252b5132
RH
1806Specify the name of a version script to the linker. This is typically
1807used when creating shared libraries to specify additional information
36f63dca 1808about the version hierarchy for the library being created. This option
252b5132
RH
1809is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
1810@xref{VERSION}.
1811
7ce691ae 1812@kindex --warn-common
252b5132
RH
1813@cindex warnings, on combining symbols
1814@cindex combining symbols, warnings on
1815@item --warn-common
1816Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol or with
560e09e9 1817a symbol definition. Unix linkers allow this somewhat sloppy practise,
252b5132
RH
1818but linkers on some other operating systems do not. This option allows
1819you to find potential problems from combining global symbols.
560e09e9 1820Unfortunately, some C libraries use this practise, so you may get some
252b5132
RH
1821warnings about symbols in the libraries as well as in your programs.
1822
1823There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C examples:
1824
1825@table @samp
1826@item int i = 1;
1827A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of the output
1828file.
1829
1830@item extern int i;
1831An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.
1832There must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
1833variable somewhere.
1834
1835@item int i;
1836A common symbol. If there are only (one or more) common symbols for a
1837variable, it goes in the uninitialized data area of the output file.
1838The linker merges multiple common symbols for the same variable into a
1839single symbol. If they are of different sizes, it picks the largest
1840size. The linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
1841a definition of the same variable.
1842@end table
1843
1844The @samp{--warn-common} option can produce five kinds of warnings.
1845Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the symbol
1846just encountered, and the second describes the previous symbol
1847encountered with the same name. One or both of the two symbols will be
1848a common symbol.
1849
1850@enumerate
1851@item
1852Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is already a
1853definition for the symbol.
1854@smallexample
1855@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1856 overridden by definition
1857@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: defined here
1858@end smallexample
1859
1860@item
1861Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later definition for
1862the symbol is encountered. This is the same as the previous case,
1863except that the symbols are encountered in a different order.
1864@smallexample
1865@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: definition of `@var{symbol}'
1866 overriding common
1867@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common is here
1868@end smallexample
1869
1870@item
1871Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common symbol.
1872@smallexample
1873@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: multiple common
1874 of `@var{symbol}'
1875@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: previous common is here
1876@end smallexample
1877
1878@item
1879Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
1880@smallexample
1881@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1882 overridden by larger common
1883@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: larger common is here
1884@end smallexample
1885
1886@item
1887Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common symbol. This is
1888the same as the previous case, except that the symbols are
1889encountered in a different order.
1890@smallexample
1891@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1892 overriding smaller common
1893@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: smaller common is here
1894@end smallexample
1895@end enumerate
1896
1897@kindex --warn-constructors
1898@item --warn-constructors
1899Warn if any global constructors are used. This is only useful for a few
1900object file formats. For formats like COFF or ELF, the linker can not
1901detect the use of global constructors.
1902
1903@kindex --warn-multiple-gp
1904@item --warn-multiple-gp
1905Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output file.
1906This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the Alpha.
1907Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants in a special
1908section. A special register (the global pointer) points into the middle
1909of this section, so that constants can be loaded efficiently via a
1910base-register relative addressing mode. Since the offset in
1911base-register relative mode is fixed and relatively small (e.g., 16
1912bits), this limits the maximum size of the constant pool. Thus, in
1913large programs, it is often necessary to use multiple global pointer
1914values in order to be able to address all possible constants. This
1915option causes a warning to be issued whenever this case occurs.
1916
1917@kindex --warn-once
1918@cindex warnings, on undefined symbols
1919@cindex undefined symbols, warnings on
1920@item --warn-once
1921Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per module
1922which refers to it.
1923
1924@kindex --warn-section-align
1925@cindex warnings, on section alignment
1926@cindex section alignment, warnings on
1927@item --warn-section-align
1928Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
1929alignment. Typically, the alignment will be set by an input section.
1930The address will only be changed if it not explicitly specified; that
1931is, if the @code{SECTIONS} command does not specify a start address for
1932the section (@pxref{SECTIONS}).
1933
8fdd7217
NC
1934@kindex --warn-shared-textrel
1935@item --warn-shared-textrel
ece2d90e 1936Warn if the linker adds a DT_TEXTREL to a shared object.
8fdd7217 1937
560e09e9
NC
1938@kindex --warn-unresolved-symbols
1939@item --warn-unresolved-symbols
1940If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the option
1941@option{--unresolved-symbols}) it will normally generate an error.
1942This option makes it generate a warning instead.
1943
1944@kindex --error-unresolved-symbols
1945@item --error-unresolved-symbols
1946This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors when
1947it is reporting unresolved symbols.
1948
252b5132
RH
1949@kindex --whole-archive
1950@cindex including an entire archive
1951@item --whole-archive
1952For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
ff5dcc92 1953@option{--whole-archive} option, include every object file in the archive
252b5132
RH
1954in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required object
1955files. This is normally used to turn an archive file into a shared
1956library, forcing every object to be included in the resulting shared
1957library. This option may be used more than once.
1958
7ec229ce 1959Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
ff5dcc92
SC
1960about this option, so you have to use @option{-Wl,-whole-archive}.
1961Second, don't forget to use @option{-Wl,-no-whole-archive} after your
7ec229ce
DD
1962list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
1963your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
1964
2509a395
SL
1965@kindex --wrap=@var{symbol}
1966@item --wrap=@var{symbol}
252b5132
RH
1967Use a wrapper function for @var{symbol}. Any undefined reference to
1968@var{symbol} will be resolved to @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. Any
1969undefined reference to @code{__real_@var{symbol}} will be resolved to
1970@var{symbol}.
1971
1972This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function. The
1973wrapper function should be called @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. If it
1974wishes to call the system function, it should call
1975@code{__real_@var{symbol}}.
1976
1977Here is a trivial example:
1978
1979@smallexample
1980void *
cc2f008e 1981__wrap_malloc (size_t c)
252b5132 1982@{
cc2f008e 1983 printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
252b5132
RH
1984 return __real_malloc (c);
1985@}
1986@end smallexample
1987
ff5dcc92 1988If you link other code with this file using @option{--wrap malloc}, then
252b5132
RH
1989all calls to @code{malloc} will call the function @code{__wrap_malloc}
1990instead. The call to @code{__real_malloc} in @code{__wrap_malloc} will
1991call the real @code{malloc} function.
1992
1993You may wish to provide a @code{__real_malloc} function as well, so that
ff5dcc92 1994links without the @option{--wrap} option will succeed. If you do this,
252b5132
RH
1995you should not put the definition of @code{__real_malloc} in the same
1996file as @code{__wrap_malloc}; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
1997call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to @code{malloc}.
1998
6aa29e7b
JJ
1999@kindex --eh-frame-hdr
2000@item --eh-frame-hdr
2001Request creation of @code{.eh_frame_hdr} section and ELF
2002@code{PT_GNU_EH_FRAME} segment header.
2003
6c1439be
L
2004@kindex --enable-new-dtags
2005@kindex --disable-new-dtags
2006@item --enable-new-dtags
2007@itemx --disable-new-dtags
2008This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older ELF
2009systems may not understand them. If you specify
ff5dcc92
SC
2010@option{--enable-new-dtags}, the dynamic tags will be created as needed.
2011If you specify @option{--disable-new-dtags}, no new dynamic tags will be
6c1439be
L
2012created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note that
2013those options are only available for ELF systems.
2014
2d643429 2015@kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
e185dd51 2016@item --hash-size=@var{number}
2d643429
NC
2017Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number
2018close to @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of
2019time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
2020increasing the linker's memory requirements. Similarly reducing this
2021value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of speed.
2022
fdc90cb4
JJ
2023@kindex --hash-style=@var{style}
2024@item --hash-style=@var{style}
2025Set the type of linker's hash table(s). @var{style} can be either
2026@code{sysv} for classic ELF @code{.hash} section, @code{gnu} for
2027new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash} section or @code{both} for both
2028the classic ELF @code{.hash} and new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash}
2029hash tables. The default is @code{sysv}.
2030
35835446
JR
2031@kindex --reduce-memory-overheads
2032@item --reduce-memory-overheads
2033This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the expense of
f2a8f148 2034linking speed. This was introduced to select the old O(n^2) algorithm
35835446 2035for link map file generation, rather than the new O(n) algorithm which uses
2d643429
NC
2036about 40% more memory for symbol storage.
2037
4f9c04f7 2038Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size to
2d643429 20391021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the linker's
a85785bc 2040run time. This is not done however if the @option{--hash-size} switch
2d643429
NC
2041has been used.
2042
2043The @option{--reduce-memory-overheads} switch may be also be used to
2044enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.
35835446 2045
c0065db7
RM
2046@kindex --build-id
2047@kindex --build-id=@var{style}
2048@item --build-id
2049@itemx --build-id=@var{style}
2050Request creation of @code{.note.gnu.build-id} ELF note section.
2051The contents of the note are unique bits identifying this linked
2052file. @var{style} can be @code{uuid} to use 128 random bits,
24382dca
RM
2053@code{sha1} to use a 160-bit @sc{SHA1} hash on the normative
2054parts of the output contents, @code{md5} to use a 128-bit
2055@sc{MD5} hash on the normative parts of the output contents, or
2056@code{0x@var{hexstring}} to use a chosen bit string specified as
2057an even number of hexadecimal digits (@code{-} and @code{:}
2058characters between digit pairs are ignored). If @var{style} is
2059omitted, @code{sha1} is used.
2060
2061The @code{md5} and @code{sha1} styles produces an identifier
2062that is always the same in an identical output file, but will be
2063unique among all nonidentical output files. It is not intended
2064to be compared as a checksum for the file's contents. A linked
2065file may be changed later by other tools, but the build ID bit
2066string identifying the original linked file does not change.
c0065db7
RM
2067
2068Passing @code{none} for @var{style} disables the setting from any
2069@code{--build-id} options earlier on the command line.
252b5132
RH
2070@end table
2071
0285c67d
NC
2072@c man end
2073
36f63dca 2074@subsection Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
252b5132 2075
0285c67d
NC
2076@c man begin OPTIONS
2077
ff5dcc92 2078The i386 PE linker supports the @option{-shared} option, which causes
252b5132
RH
2079the output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a
2080normal executable. You should name the output @code{*.dll} when you
2081use this option. In addition, the linker fully supports the standard
2082@code{*.def} files, which may be specified on the linker command line
2083like an object file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports
2084symbols from, to ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal
2085object file).
2086
2087In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
2088support additional command line options that are specific to the i386
2089PE target. Options that take values may be separated from their
2090values by either a space or an equals sign.
2091
ff5dcc92 2092@table @gcctabopt
252b5132
RH
2093
2094@kindex --add-stdcall-alias
2095@item --add-stdcall-alias
2096If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@@@var{nn}) will be exported
2097as-is and also with the suffix stripped.
bb10df36 2098[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2099
2100@kindex --base-file
2101@item --base-file @var{file}
2102Use @var{file} as the name of a file in which to save the base
2103addresses of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with
2104@file{dlltool}.
bb10df36 2105[This is an i386 PE specific option]
252b5132
RH
2106
2107@kindex --dll
2108@item --dll
2109Create a DLL instead of a regular executable. You may also use
ff5dcc92 2110@option{-shared} or specify a @code{LIBRARY} in a given @code{.def}
252b5132 2111file.
bb10df36 2112[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2113
88183869
DK
2114@kindex --enable-long-section-names
2115@kindex --disable-long-section-names
2116@item --enable-long-section-names
2117@itemx --disable-long-section-names
2118The PE variants of the Coff object format add an extension that permits
2119the use of section names longer than eight characters, the normal limit
2120for Coff. By default, these names are only allowed in object files, as
2121fully-linked executable images do not carry the Coff string table required
2122to support the longer names. As a GNU extension, it is possible to
2123allow their use in executable images as well, or to (probably pointlessly!)
2124disallow it in object files, by using these two options. Executable images
2125generated with these long section names are slightly non-standard, carrying
2126as they do a string table, and may generate confusing output when examined
3efd345c
DK
2127with non-GNU PE-aware tools, such as file viewers and dumpers. However,
2128GDB relies on the use of PE long section names to find Dwarf-2 debug
2129information sections in an executable image at runtime, and so if neither
2130option is specified on the command-line, @command{ld} will enable long
2131section names, overriding the default and technically correct behaviour,
2132when it finds the presence of debug information while linking an executable
2133image and not stripping symbols.
88183869
DK
2134[This option is valid for all PE targeted ports of the linker]
2135
252b5132
RH
2136@kindex --enable-stdcall-fixup
2137@kindex --disable-stdcall-fixup
2138@item --enable-stdcall-fixup
2139@itemx --disable-stdcall-fixup
2140If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt to
36f63dca 2141do ``fuzzy linking'' by looking for another defined symbol that differs
252b5132
RH
2142only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall) and will
2143resolve that symbol by linking to the match. For example, the
2144undefined symbol @code{_foo} might be linked to the function
2145@code{_foo@@12}, or the undefined symbol @code{_bar@@16} might be linked
2146to the function @code{_bar}. When the linker does this, it prints a
2147warning, since it normally should have failed to link, but sometimes
2148import libraries generated from third-party dlls may need this feature
ff5dcc92 2149to be usable. If you specify @option{--enable-stdcall-fixup}, this
252b5132 2150feature is fully enabled and warnings are not printed. If you specify
ff5dcc92 2151@option{--disable-stdcall-fixup}, this feature is disabled and such
252b5132 2152mismatches are considered to be errors.
bb10df36 2153[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2154
2155@cindex DLLs, creating
2156@kindex --export-all-symbols
2157@item --export-all-symbols
2158If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL will
2159be exported by the DLL. Note that this is the default if there
2160otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols. When symbols are
2161explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via function
2162attributes, the default is to not export anything else unless this
2163option is given. Note that the symbols @code{DllMain@@12},
ece2d90e 2164@code{DllEntryPoint@@0}, @code{DllMainCRTStartup@@12}, and
b044cda1 2165@code{impure_ptr} will not be automatically
ece2d90e
NC
2166exported. Also, symbols imported from other DLLs will not be
2167re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the DLL's internal layout
2168such as those beginning with @code{_head_} or ending with
2169@code{_iname}. In addition, no symbols from @code{libgcc},
b044cda1
CW
2170@code{libstd++}, @code{libmingw32}, or @code{crtX.o} will be exported.
2171Symbols whose names begin with @code{__rtti_} or @code{__builtin_} will
2172not be exported, to help with C++ DLLs. Finally, there is an
ece2d90e 2173extensive list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported
b044cda1 2174(obviously, this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).
ece2d90e 2175These cygwin-excludes are: @code{_cygwin_dll_entry@@12},
b044cda1 2176@code{_cygwin_crt0_common@@8}, @code{_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@@12},
ece2d90e 2177@code{_fmode}, @code{_impure_ptr}, @code{cygwin_attach_dll},
b044cda1 2178@code{cygwin_premain0}, @code{cygwin_premain1}, @code{cygwin_premain2},
ece2d90e 2179@code{cygwin_premain3}, and @code{environ}.
bb10df36 2180[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2181
2182@kindex --exclude-symbols
1d0a3c9c 2183@item --exclude-symbols @var{symbol},@var{symbol},...
252b5132
RH
2184Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
2185exported. The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
bb10df36 2186[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2187
2188@kindex --file-alignment
2189@item --file-alignment
2190Specify the file alignment. Sections in the file will always begin at
2191file offsets which are multiples of this number. This defaults to
2192512.
bb10df36 2193[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2194
2195@cindex heap size
2196@kindex --heap
2197@item --heap @var{reserve}
2198@itemx --heap @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5
DS
2199Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2200to be used as heap for this program. The default is 1Mb reserved, 4K
252b5132 2201committed.
bb10df36 2202[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2203
2204@cindex image base
2205@kindex --image-base
2206@item --image-base @var{value}
2207Use @var{value} as the base address of your program or dll. This is
2208the lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
2209is loaded. To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance of
2210your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not overlap any
2211other dlls. The default is 0x400000 for executables, and 0x10000000
2212for dlls.
bb10df36 2213[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2214
2215@kindex --kill-at
2216@item --kill-at
2217If given, the stdcall suffixes (@@@var{nn}) will be stripped from
2218symbols before they are exported.
bb10df36 2219[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2220
26d2d8a2
BF
2221@kindex --large-address-aware
2222@item --large-address-aware
b45619c0 2223If given, the appropriate bit in the ``Characteristics'' field of the COFF
26d2d8a2 2224header is set to indicate that this executable supports virtual addresses
b45619c0 2225greater than 2 gigabytes. This should be used in conjunction with the /3GB
26d2d8a2
BF
2226or /USERVA=@var{value} megabytes switch in the ``[operating systems]''
2227section of the BOOT.INI. Otherwise, this bit has no effect.
2228[This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2229
252b5132
RH
2230@kindex --major-image-version
2231@item --major-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2232Sets the major number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 1.
bb10df36 2233[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2234
2235@kindex --major-os-version
2236@item --major-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2237Sets the major number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2238[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2239
2240@kindex --major-subsystem-version
2241@item --major-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2242Sets the major number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2243[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2244
2245@kindex --minor-image-version
2246@item --minor-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2247Sets the minor number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2248[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2249
2250@kindex --minor-os-version
2251@item --minor-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2252Sets the minor number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2253[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2254
2255@kindex --minor-subsystem-version
2256@item --minor-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2257Sets the minor number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2258[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2259
2260@cindex DEF files, creating
2261@cindex DLLs, creating
2262@kindex --output-def
2263@item --output-def @var{file}
2264The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain a DEF
2265file corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This DEF file
2266(which should be called @code{*.def}) may be used to create an import
2267library with @code{dlltool} or may be used as a reference to
2268automatically or implicitly exported symbols.
bb10df36 2269[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2270
b044cda1
CW
2271@cindex DLLs, creating
2272@kindex --out-implib
2273@item --out-implib @var{file}
2274The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain an
2275import lib corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This
2276import lib (which should be called @code{*.dll.a} or @code{*.a}
560e09e9 2277may be used to link clients against the generated DLL; this behaviour
b044cda1
CW
2278makes it possible to skip a separate @code{dlltool} import library
2279creation step.
bb10df36 2280[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2281
2282@kindex --enable-auto-image-base
2283@item --enable-auto-image-base
2284Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, unless one is specified
2285using the @code{--image-base} argument. By using a hash generated
2286from the dllname to create unique image bases for each DLL, in-memory
2287collisions and relocations which can delay program execution are
2288avoided.
bb10df36 2289[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2290
2291@kindex --disable-auto-image-base
2292@item --disable-auto-image-base
2293Do not automatically generate a unique image base. If there is no
2294user-specified image base (@code{--image-base}) then use the platform
2295default.
bb10df36 2296[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2297
2298@cindex DLLs, linking to
2299@kindex --dll-search-prefix
2300@item --dll-search-prefix @var{string}
489d0400 2301When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
ece2d90e 2302search for @code{<string><basename>.dll} in preference to
560e09e9 2303@code{lib<basename>.dll}. This behaviour allows easy distinction
b044cda1
CW
2304between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin,
2305uwin, pw, etc. For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
ece2d90e 2306@code{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}.
bb10df36 2307[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2308
2309@kindex --enable-auto-import
2310@item --enable-auto-import
ece2d90e
NC
2311Do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to @code{__imp__symbol} for
2312DATA imports from DLLs, and create the necessary thunking symbols when
4d8907ac
DS
2313building the import libraries with those DATA exports. Note: Use of the
2314'auto-import' extension will cause the text section of the image file
2315to be made writable. This does not conform to the PE-COFF format
2316specification published by Microsoft.
2317
e2a83dd0
NC
2318Note - use of the 'auto-import' extension will also cause read only
2319data which would normally be placed into the .rdata section to be
2320placed into the .data section instead. This is in order to work
2321around a problem with consts that is described here:
2322http://www.cygwin.com/ml/cygwin/2004-09/msg01101.html
2323
4d8907ac
DS
2324Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' -- but sometimes you may
2325see this message:
0d888aac 2326
ece2d90e 2327"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
0d888aac
CW
2328documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
2329
ece2d90e
NC
2330This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
2331ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables only
c0065db7
RM
2332allow one). Instances where this may occur include accesses to member
2333fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well as using a
2334constant index into an array variable imported from a DLL. Any
2f8d8971
NC
2335multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may trigger
2336this error condition. However, regardless of the exact data type
2337of the offending exported variable, ld will always detect it, issue
2338the warning, and exit.
2339
2340There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of the
2341data type of the exported variable:
0d888aac 2342
2fa9fc65
NC
2343One way is to use --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves the task
2344of adjusting references in your client code for runtime environment, so
560e09e9 2345this method works only when runtime environment supports this feature.
2fa9fc65 2346
c0065db7
RM
2347A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a variable --
2348that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time. For arrays,
2349there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the array's address)
0d888aac
CW
2350a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a variable. Thus:
2351
2352@example
2353extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2354extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2355 @{ volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] @}
2356@end example
2357
2358or
2359
2360@example
2361extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2362extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2363 @{ volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] @}
2364@end example
2365
c0065db7 2366For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
2f8d8971 2367is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...) variable:
0d888aac
CW
2368
2369@example
2370extern struct s extern_struct;
c0065db7 2371extern_struct.field -->
0d888aac
CW
2372 @{ volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field @}
2373@end example
2374
c406afaf
NC
2375or
2376
2377@example
2378extern long long extern_ll;
2379extern_ll -->
2380 @{ volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll @}
2381@end example
2382
2fa9fc65 2383A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
c0065db7 2384'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
560e09e9 2385@code{__declspec(dllimport)}. However, in practise that
0d888aac 2386requires using compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are
c0065db7
RM
2387building a DLL, building client code that will link to the DLL, or
2388merely building/linking to a static library. In making the choice
2389between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with
0d888aac
CW
2390constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world usage:
2391
2392Original:
2393@example
2394--foo.h
2395extern int arr[];
2396--foo.c
2397#include "foo.h"
2398void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2399 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2400@}
2401@end example
2402
2403Solution 1:
2404@example
2405--foo.h
2406extern int arr[];
2407--foo.c
2408#include "foo.h"
2409void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2410 /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
2411 volatile int *parr = arr;
2412 printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
2413@}
2414@end example
2415
2416Solution 2:
2417@example
2418--foo.h
2419/* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
2420#if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
2421 !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
2422#define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
2423#else
2424#define FOO_IMPORT
2425#endif
2426extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
2427--foo.c
2428#include "foo.h"
2429void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2430 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2431@}
2432@end example
2433
c0065db7 2434A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your
0d888aac
CW
2435library to use a functional interface rather than a data interface
2436for the offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
2437functions).
bb10df36 2438[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2439
2440@kindex --disable-auto-import
2441@item --disable-auto-import
c0065db7 2442Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to
b044cda1 2443@code{__imp__symbol} for DATA imports from DLLs.
bb10df36 2444[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2445
2fa9fc65
NC
2446@kindex --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2447@item --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2448If your code contains expressions described in --enable-auto-import section,
2449that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this switch will create
2450a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which can be used by runtime
c0065db7 2451environment to adjust references to such data in your client code.
bb10df36 2452[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65
NC
2453
2454@kindex --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2455@item --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2456Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports from
2457DLLs. This is the default.
bb10df36 2458[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65 2459
b044cda1
CW
2460@kindex --enable-extra-pe-debug
2461@item --enable-extra-pe-debug
2462Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
bb10df36 2463[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2464
252b5132
RH
2465@kindex --section-alignment
2466@item --section-alignment
2467Sets the section alignment. Sections in memory will always begin at
2468addresses which are a multiple of this number. Defaults to 0x1000.
bb10df36 2469[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2470
2471@cindex stack size
2472@kindex --stack
2473@item --stack @var{reserve}
2474@itemx --stack @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5
DS
2475Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2476to be used as stack for this program. The default is 2Mb reserved, 4K
252b5132 2477committed.
bb10df36 2478[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2479
2480@kindex --subsystem
2481@item --subsystem @var{which}
2482@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}
2483@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}.@var{minor}
2484Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute. The
2485legal values for @var{which} are @code{native}, @code{windows},
33f362e1
NC
2486@code{console}, @code{posix}, and @code{xbox}. You may optionally set
2487the subsystem version also. Numeric values are also accepted for
2488@var{which}.
bb10df36 2489[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2490
2f563b51
DK
2491The following options set flags in the @code{DllCharacteristics} field
2492of the PE file header:
2493[These options are specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2494
2495@kindex --dynamicbase
2496@item --dynamicbase
2497The image base address may be relocated using address space layout
2498randomization (ASLR). This feature was introduced with MS Windows
2499Vista for i386 PE targets.
2500
2501@kindex --forceinteg
2502@item --forceinteg
2503Code integrity checks are enforced.
2504
2505@kindex --nxcompat
2506@item --nxcompat
2507The image is compatible with the Data Execution Prevention.
2508This feature was introduced with MS Windows XP SP2 for i386 PE targets.
2509
2510@kindex --no-isolation
2511@item --no-isolation
2512Although the image understands isolation, do not isolate the image.
2513
2514@kindex --no-seh
2515@item --no-seh
2516The image does not use SEH. No SE handler may be called from
2517this image.
2518
2519@kindex --no-bind
2520@item --no-bind
2521Do not bind this image.
2522
2523@kindex --wdmdriver
2524@item --wdmdriver
2525The driver uses the MS Windows Driver Model.
2526
2527@kindex --tsaware
2528@item --tsaware
2529The image is Terminal Server aware.
2530
252b5132
RH
2531@end table
2532
0285c67d
NC
2533@c man end
2534
93fd0973
SC
2535@ifset M68HC11
2536@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets
2537
2538@c man begin OPTIONS
2539
2540The 68HC11 and 68HC12 linkers support specific options to control the
2541memory bank switching mapping and trampoline code generation.
2542
2543@table @gcctabopt
2544
2545@kindex --no-trampoline
2546@item --no-trampoline
2547This option disables the generation of trampoline. By default a trampoline
2548is generated for each far function which is called using a @code{jsr}
2549instruction (this happens when a pointer to a far function is taken).
2550
2551@kindex --bank-window
2552@item --bank-window @var{name}
2553This option indicates to the linker the name of the memory region in
2554the @samp{MEMORY} specification that describes the memory bank window.
2555The definition of such region is then used by the linker to compute
2556paging and addresses within the memory window.
2557
2558@end table
2559
2560@c man end
2561@end ifset
2562
7fb9f789
NC
2563@ifset M68K
2564@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68K target
2565
2566@c man begin OPTIONS
2567
2568The following options are supported to control handling of GOT generation
2569when linking for 68K targets.
2570
2571@table @gcctabopt
2572
2573@kindex --got
2574@item --got=@var{type}
2575This option tells the linker which GOT generation scheme to use.
2576@var{type} should be one of @samp{single}, @samp{negative},
2577@samp{multigot} or @samp{target}. For more information refer to the
2578Info entry for @file{ld}.
2579
2580@end table
2581
2582@c man end
2583@end ifset
2584
252b5132
RH
2585@ifset UsesEnvVars
2586@node Environment
2587@section Environment Variables
2588
0285c67d
NC
2589@c man begin ENVIRONMENT
2590
560e09e9 2591You can change the behaviour of @command{ld} with the environment variables
36f63dca
NC
2592@ifclear SingleFormat
2593@code{GNUTARGET},
2594@end ifclear
2595@code{LDEMULATION} and @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}.
252b5132 2596
36f63dca 2597@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
2598@kindex GNUTARGET
2599@cindex default input format
2600@code{GNUTARGET} determines the input-file object format if you don't
2601use @samp{-b} (or its synonym @samp{--format}). Its value should be one
2602of the BFD names for an input format (@pxref{BFD}). If there is no
ff5dcc92 2603@code{GNUTARGET} in the environment, @command{ld} uses the natural format
252b5132
RH
2604of the target. If @code{GNUTARGET} is set to @code{default} then BFD
2605attempts to discover the input format by examining binary input files;
2606this method often succeeds, but there are potential ambiguities, since
2607there is no method of ensuring that the magic number used to specify
2608object-file formats is unique. However, the configuration procedure for
2609BFD on each system places the conventional format for that system first
2610in the search-list, so ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
36f63dca 2611@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
2612
2613@kindex LDEMULATION
2614@cindex default emulation
2615@cindex emulation, default
2616@code{LDEMULATION} determines the default emulation if you don't use the
2617@samp{-m} option. The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
2618behaviour, particularly the default linker script. You can list the
2619available emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options. If
2620the @samp{-m} option is not used, and the @code{LDEMULATION} environment
2621variable is not defined, the default emulation depends upon how the
2622linker was configured.
252b5132
RH
2623
2624@kindex COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE
2625@cindex demangling, default
2626Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols. However, if
2627@code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE} is set in the environment, then it will
2628default to not demangling symbols. This environment variable is used in
2629a similar fashion by the @code{gcc} linker wrapper program. The default
2630may be overridden by the @samp{--demangle} and @samp{--no-demangle}
2631options.
2632
0285c67d
NC
2633@c man end
2634@end ifset
2635
252b5132
RH
2636@node Scripts
2637@chapter Linker Scripts
2638
2639@cindex scripts
2640@cindex linker scripts
2641@cindex command files
2642Every link is controlled by a @dfn{linker script}. This script is
2643written in the linker command language.
2644
2645The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the sections in
2646the input files should be mapped into the output file, and to control
2647the memory layout of the output file. Most linker scripts do nothing
2648more than this. However, when necessary, the linker script can also
2649direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the commands
2650described below.
2651
2652The linker always uses a linker script. If you do not supply one
2653yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
2654linker executable. You can use the @samp{--verbose} command line option
2655to display the default linker script. Certain command line options,
2656such as @samp{-r} or @samp{-N}, will affect the default linker script.
2657
2658You may supply your own linker script by using the @samp{-T} command
2659line option. When you do this, your linker script will replace the
2660default linker script.
2661
2662You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input files
2663to the linker, as though they were files to be linked. @xref{Implicit
2664Linker Scripts}.
2665
2666@menu
2667* Basic Script Concepts:: Basic Linker Script Concepts
2668* Script Format:: Linker Script Format
2669* Simple Example:: Simple Linker Script Example
2670* Simple Commands:: Simple Linker Script Commands
2671* Assignments:: Assigning Values to Symbols
2672* SECTIONS:: SECTIONS Command
2673* MEMORY:: MEMORY Command
2674* PHDRS:: PHDRS Command
2675* VERSION:: VERSION Command
2676* Expressions:: Expressions in Linker Scripts
2677* Implicit Linker Scripts:: Implicit Linker Scripts
2678@end menu
2679
2680@node Basic Script Concepts
2681@section Basic Linker Script Concepts
2682@cindex linker script concepts
2683We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
2684describe the linker script language.
2685
2686The linker combines input files into a single output file. The output
2687file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
2688@dfn{object file format}. Each file is called an @dfn{object file}.
2689The output file is often called an @dfn{executable}, but for our
2690purposes we will also call it an object file. Each object file has,
2691among other things, a list of @dfn{sections}. We sometimes refer to a
2692section in an input file as an @dfn{input section}; similarly, a section
2693in the output file is an @dfn{output section}.
2694
2695Each section in an object file has a name and a size. Most sections
2696also have an associated block of data, known as the @dfn{section
2697contents}. A section may be marked as @dfn{loadable}, which mean that
2698the contents should be loaded into memory when the output file is run.
2699A section with no contents may be @dfn{allocatable}, which means that an
2700area in memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be
2701loaded there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out). A section
2702which is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort
2703of debugging information.
2704
2705Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses. The
2706first is the @dfn{VMA}, or virtual memory address. This is the address
2707the section will have when the output file is run. The second is the
2708@dfn{LMA}, or load memory address. This is the address at which the
2709section will be loaded. In most cases the two addresses will be the
2710same. An example of when they might be different is when a data section
2711is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up
2712(this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM
2713based system). In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the
2714RAM address would be the VMA.
2715
2716You can see the sections in an object file by using the @code{objdump}
2717program with the @samp{-h} option.
2718
2719Every object file also has a list of @dfn{symbols}, known as the
2720@dfn{symbol table}. A symbol may be defined or undefined. Each symbol
2721has a name, and each defined symbol has an address, among other
2722information. If you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you
2723will get a defined symbol for every defined function and global or
2724static variable. Every undefined function or global variable which is
2725referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol.
2726
2727You can see the symbols in an object file by using the @code{nm}
2728program, or by using the @code{objdump} program with the @samp{-t}
2729option.
2730
2731@node Script Format
2732@section Linker Script Format
2733@cindex linker script format
2734Linker scripts are text files.
2735
2736You write a linker script as a series of commands. Each command is
2737either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
2738symbol. You may separate commands using semicolons. Whitespace is
2739generally ignored.
2740
2741Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered directly.
2742If the file name contains a character such as a comma which would
2743otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name in
2744double quotes. There is no way to use a double quote character in a
2745file name.
2746
2747You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
2748@samp{/*} and @samp{*/}. As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent
2749to whitespace.
2750
2751@node Simple Example
2752@section Simple Linker Script Example
2753@cindex linker script example
2754@cindex example of linker script
2755Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
2756
2757The simplest possible linker script has just one command:
2758@samp{SECTIONS}. You use the @samp{SECTIONS} command to describe the
2759memory layout of the output file.
2760
2761The @samp{SECTIONS} command is a powerful command. Here we will
2762describe a simple use of it. Let's assume your program consists only of
2763code, initialized data, and uninitialized data. These will be in the
2764@samp{.text}, @samp{.data}, and @samp{.bss} sections, respectively.
2765Let's assume further that these are the only sections which appear in
2766your input files.
2767
2768For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
27690x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000. Here is a
2770linker script which will do that:
2771@smallexample
2772SECTIONS
2773@{
2774 . = 0x10000;
2775 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
2776 . = 0x8000000;
2777 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
2778 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
2779@}
2780@end smallexample
2781
2782You write the @samp{SECTIONS} command as the keyword @samp{SECTIONS},
2783followed by a series of symbol assignments and output section
2784descriptions enclosed in curly braces.
2785
252b5132
RH
2786The first line inside the @samp{SECTIONS} command of the above example
2787sets the value of the special symbol @samp{.}, which is the location
2788counter. If you do not specify the address of an output section in some
2789other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the
2790current value of the location counter. The location counter is then
2791incremented by the size of the output section. At the start of the
2792@samp{SECTIONS} command, the location counter has the value @samp{0}.
2793
2794The second line defines an output section, @samp{.text}. The colon is
2795required syntax which may be ignored for now. Within the curly braces
2796after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
2797which should be placed into this output section. The @samp{*} is a
2798wildcard which matches any file name. The expression @samp{*(.text)}
2799means all @samp{.text} input sections in all input files.
2800
2801Since the location counter is @samp{0x10000} when the output section
2802@samp{.text} is defined, the linker will set the address of the
2803@samp{.text} section in the output file to be @samp{0x10000}.
2804
2805The remaining lines define the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss} sections in
2806the output file. The linker will place the @samp{.data} output section
2807at address @samp{0x8000000}. After the linker places the @samp{.data}
2808output section, the value of the location counter will be
2809@samp{0x8000000} plus the size of the @samp{.data} output section. The
2810effect is that the linker will place the @samp{.bss} output section
58434bc1 2811immediately after the @samp{.data} output section in memory.
252b5132
RH
2812
2813The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
2814alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary. In this
2815example, the specified addresses for the @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}
2816sections will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker
2817may have to create a small gap between the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss}
2818sections.
2819
2820That's it! That's a simple and complete linker script.
2821
2822@node Simple Commands
2823@section Simple Linker Script Commands
2824@cindex linker script simple commands
2825In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
2826
2827@menu
2828* Entry Point:: Setting the entry point
2829* File Commands:: Commands dealing with files
2830@ifclear SingleFormat
2831* Format Commands:: Commands dealing with object file formats
2832@end ifclear
2833
4a93e180 2834* REGION_ALIAS:: Assign alias names to memory regions
252b5132
RH
2835* Miscellaneous Commands:: Other linker script commands
2836@end menu
2837
2838@node Entry Point
36f63dca 2839@subsection Setting the Entry Point
252b5132
RH
2840@kindex ENTRY(@var{symbol})
2841@cindex start of execution
2842@cindex first instruction
2843@cindex entry point
2844The first instruction to execute in a program is called the @dfn{entry
2845point}. You can use the @code{ENTRY} linker script command to set the
2846entry point. The argument is a symbol name:
2847@smallexample
2848ENTRY(@var{symbol})
2849@end smallexample
2850
2851There are several ways to set the entry point. The linker will set the
2852entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
2853stopping when one of them succeeds:
2854@itemize @bullet
a1ab1d2a 2855@item
252b5132 2856the @samp{-e} @var{entry} command-line option;
a1ab1d2a 2857@item
252b5132 2858the @code{ENTRY(@var{symbol})} command in a linker script;
a1ab1d2a 2859@item
252b5132 2860the value of the symbol @code{start}, if defined;
a1ab1d2a 2861@item
252b5132 2862the address of the first byte of the @samp{.text} section, if present;
a1ab1d2a 2863@item
252b5132
RH
2864The address @code{0}.
2865@end itemize
2866
2867@node File Commands
36f63dca 2868@subsection Commands Dealing with Files
252b5132
RH
2869@cindex linker script file commands
2870Several linker script commands deal with files.
2871
2872@table @code
2873@item INCLUDE @var{filename}
2874@kindex INCLUDE @var{filename}
2875@cindex including a linker script
2876Include the linker script @var{filename} at this point. The file will
2877be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory specified
ff5dcc92 2878with the @option{-L} option. You can nest calls to @code{INCLUDE} up to
252b5132
RH
287910 levels deep.
2880
4006703d
NS
2881You can place @code{INCLUDE} directives at the top level, in @code{MEMORY} or
2882@code{SECTIONS} commands, or in output section descriptions.
2883
252b5132
RH
2884@item INPUT(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
2885@itemx INPUT(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
2886@kindex INPUT(@var{files})
2887@cindex input files in linker scripts
2888@cindex input object files in linker scripts
2889@cindex linker script input object files
2890The @code{INPUT} command directs the linker to include the named files
2891in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
2892
2893For example, if you always want to include @file{subr.o} any time you do
2894a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command line,
2895then you can put @samp{INPUT (subr.o)} in your linker script.
2896
2897In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the linker
2898script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a @samp{-T} option.
2899
e3f2db7f
AO
2900In case a @dfn{sysroot prefix} is configured, and the filename starts
2901with the @samp{/} character, and the script being processed was
2902located inside the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, the filename will be looked
2903for in the @dfn{sysroot prefix}. Otherwise, the linker will try to
2904open the file in the current directory. If it is not found, the
2905linker will search through the archive library search path. See the
2906description of @samp{-L} in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
252b5132 2907
ff5dcc92 2908If you use @samp{INPUT (-l@var{file})}, @command{ld} will transform the
252b5132
RH
2909name to @code{lib@var{file}.a}, as with the command line argument
2910@samp{-l}.
2911
2912When you use the @code{INPUT} command in an implicit linker script, the
2913files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
2914script file is included. This can affect archive searching.
2915
2916@item GROUP(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
2917@itemx GROUP(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
2918@kindex GROUP(@var{files})
2919@cindex grouping input files
2920The @code{GROUP} command is like @code{INPUT}, except that the named
2921files should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
2922new undefined references are created. See the description of @samp{-(}
2923in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
2924
b717d30e
JJ
2925@item AS_NEEDED(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
2926@itemx AS_NEEDED(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
2927@kindex AS_NEEDED(@var{files})
2928This construct can appear only inside of the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP}
2929commands, among other filenames. The files listed will be handled
2930as if they appear directly in the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} commands,
2931with the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only
2932when they are actually needed. This construct essentially enables
2933@option{--as-needed} option for all the files listed inside of it
2934and restores previous @option{--as-needed} resp. @option{--no-as-needed}
2935setting afterwards.
2936
252b5132
RH
2937@item OUTPUT(@var{filename})
2938@kindex OUTPUT(@var{filename})
b45619c0 2939@cindex output file name in linker script
252b5132
RH
2940The @code{OUTPUT} command names the output file. Using
2941@code{OUTPUT(@var{filename})} in the linker script is exactly like using
2942@samp{-o @var{filename}} on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command
2943Line Options}). If both are used, the command line option takes
2944precedence.
2945
2946You can use the @code{OUTPUT} command to define a default name for the
2947output file other than the usual default of @file{a.out}.
2948
2949@item SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
2950@kindex SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
2951@cindex library search path in linker script
2952@cindex archive search path in linker script
2953@cindex search path in linker script
2954The @code{SEARCH_DIR} command adds @var{path} to the list of paths where
ff5dcc92 2955@command{ld} looks for archive libraries. Using
252b5132
RH
2956@code{SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})} is exactly like using @samp{-L @var{path}}
2957on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both
2958are used, then the linker will search both paths. Paths specified using
2959the command line option are searched first.
2960
2961@item STARTUP(@var{filename})
2962@kindex STARTUP(@var{filename})
2963@cindex first input file
2964The @code{STARTUP} command is just like the @code{INPUT} command, except
2965that @var{filename} will become the first input file to be linked, as
2966though it were specified first on the command line. This may be useful
2967when using a system in which the entry point is always the start of the
2968first file.
2969@end table
2970
2971@ifclear SingleFormat
2972@node Format Commands
36f63dca 2973@subsection Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
252b5132
RH
2974A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
2975
2976@table @code
2977@item OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
2978@itemx OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{default}, @var{big}, @var{little})
2979@kindex OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
2980@cindex output file format in linker script
2981The @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command names the BFD format to use for the
2982output file (@pxref{BFD}). Using @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})} is
024531e2 2983exactly like using @samp{--oformat @var{bfdname}} on the command line
252b5132
RH
2984(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both are used, the command
2985line option takes precedence.
2986
2987You can use @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} with three arguments to use different
2988formats based on the @samp{-EB} and @samp{-EL} command line options.
2989This permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
2990desired endianness.
2991
2992If neither @samp{-EB} nor @samp{-EL} are used, then the output format
2993will be the first argument, @var{default}. If @samp{-EB} is used, the
2994output format will be the second argument, @var{big}. If @samp{-EL} is
2995used, the output format will be the third argument, @var{little}.
2996
2997For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target uses this
2998command:
2999@smallexample
3000OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
3001@end smallexample
3002This says that the default format for the output file is
3003@samp{elf32-bigmips}, but if the user uses the @samp{-EL} command line
3004option, the output file will be created in the @samp{elf32-littlemips}
3005format.
3006
3007@item TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3008@kindex TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3009@cindex input file format in linker script
3010The @code{TARGET} command names the BFD format to use when reading input
3011files. It affects subsequent @code{INPUT} and @code{GROUP} commands.
3012This command is like using @samp{-b @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3013(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If the @code{TARGET} command
3014is used but @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} is not, then the last @code{TARGET}
3015command is also used to set the format for the output file. @xref{BFD}.
3016@end table
3017@end ifclear
3018
4a93e180
NC
3019@node REGION_ALIAS
3020@subsection Assign alias names to memory regions
3021@kindex REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3022@cindex region alias
3023@cindex region names
3024
3025Alias names can be added to existing memory regions created with the
3026@ref{MEMORY} command. Each name corresponds to at most one memory region.
3027
3028@smallexample
3029REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3030@end smallexample
3031
3032The @code{REGION_ALIAS} function creates an alias name @var{alias} for the
3033memory region @var{region}. This allows a flexible mapping of output sections
3034to memory regions. An example follows.
3035
3036Suppose we have an application for embedded systems which come with various
3037memory storage devices. All have a general purpose, volatile memory @code{RAM}
3038that allows code execution or data storage. Some may have a read-only,
3039non-volatile memory @code{ROM} that allows code execution and read-only data
3040access. The last variant is a read-only, non-volatile memory @code{ROM2} with
3041read-only data access and no code execution capability. We have four output
3042sections:
3043
3044@itemize @bullet
3045@item
3046@code{.text} program code;
3047@item
3048@code{.rodata} read-only data;
3049@item
3050@code{.data} read-write initialized data;
3051@item
3052@code{.bss} read-write zero initialized data.
3053@end itemize
3054
3055The goal is to provide a linker command file that contains a system independent
3056part defining the output sections and a system dependent part mapping the
3057output sections to the memory regions available on the system. Our embedded
3058systems come with three different memory setups @code{A}, @code{B} and
3059@code{C}:
3060@multitable @columnfractions .25 .25 .25 .25
3061@item Section @tab Variant A @tab Variant B @tab Variant C
3062@item .text @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM
3063@item .rodata @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM2
3064@item .data @tab RAM @tab RAM/ROM @tab RAM/ROM2
3065@item .bss @tab RAM @tab RAM @tab RAM
3066@end multitable
3067The notation @code{RAM/ROM} or @code{RAM/ROM2} means that this section is
3068loaded into region @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} respectively. Please note that
3069the load address of the @code{.data} section starts in all three variants at
3070the end of the @code{.rodata} section.
3071
3072The base linker script that deals with the output sections follows. It
3073includes the system dependent @code{linkcmds.memory} file that describes the
3074memory layout:
3075@smallexample
3076INCLUDE linkcmds.memory
3077
3078SECTIONS
3079 @{
3080 .text :
3081 @{
3082 *(.text)
3083 @} > REGION_TEXT
3084 .rodata :
3085 @{
3086 *(.rodata)
3087 rodata_end = .;
3088 @} > REGION_RODATA
3089 .data : AT (rodata_end)
3090 @{
3091 data_start = .;
3092 *(.data)
3093 @} > REGION_DATA
3094 data_size = SIZEOF(.data);
3095 data_load_start = LOADADDR(.data);
3096 .bss :
3097 @{
3098 *(.bss)
3099 @} > REGION_BSS
3100 @}
3101@end smallexample
3102
3103Now we need three different @code{linkcmds.memory} files to define memory
3104regions and alias names. The content of @code{linkcmds.memory} for the three
3105variants @code{A}, @code{B} and @code{C}:
3106@table @code
3107@item A
3108Here everything goes into the @code{RAM}.
3109@smallexample
3110MEMORY
3111 @{
3112 RAM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 4M
3113 @}
3114
3115REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", RAM);
3116REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", RAM);
3117REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3118REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3119@end smallexample
3120@item B
3121Program code and read-only data go into the @code{ROM}. Read-write data goes
3122into the @code{RAM}. An image of the initialized data is loaded into the
3123@code{ROM} and will be copied during system start into the @code{RAM}.
3124@smallexample
3125MEMORY
3126 @{
3127 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 3M
3128 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3129 @}
3130
3131REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3132REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM);
3133REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3134REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3135@end smallexample
3136@item C
3137Program code goes into the @code{ROM}. Read-only data goes into the
3138@code{ROM2}. Read-write data goes into the @code{RAM}. An image of the
3139initialized data is loaded into the @code{ROM2} and will be copied during
3140system start into the @code{RAM}.
3141@smallexample
3142MEMORY
3143 @{
3144 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 2M
3145 ROM2 : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3146 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x20000000, LENGTH = 1M
3147 @}
3148
3149REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3150REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM2);
3151REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3152REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3153@end smallexample
3154@end table
3155
3156It is possible to write a common system initialization routine to copy the
3157@code{.data} section from @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} into the @code{RAM} if
3158necessary:
3159@smallexample
3160#include <string.h>
3161
3162extern char data_start [];
3163extern char data_size [];
3164extern char data_load_start [];
3165
3166void copy_data(void)
3167@{
3168 if (data_start != data_load_start)
3169 @{
3170 memcpy(data_start, data_load_start, (size_t) data_size);
3171 @}
3172@}
3173@end smallexample
3174
252b5132 3175@node Miscellaneous Commands
36f63dca 3176@subsection Other Linker Script Commands
252b5132
RH
3177There are a few other linker scripts commands.
3178
3179@table @code
3180@item ASSERT(@var{exp}, @var{message})
3181@kindex ASSERT
3182@cindex assertion in linker script
3183Ensure that @var{exp} is non-zero. If it is zero, then exit the linker
3184with an error code, and print @var{message}.
3185
3186@item EXTERN(@var{symbol} @var{symbol} @dots{})
3187@kindex EXTERN
3188@cindex undefined symbol in linker script
3189Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
3190symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
3191modules from standard libraries. You may list several @var{symbol}s for
3192each @code{EXTERN}, and you may use @code{EXTERN} multiple times. This
3193command has the same effect as the @samp{-u} command-line option.
3194
3195@item FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3196@kindex FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3197@cindex common allocation in linker script
3198This command has the same effect as the @samp{-d} command-line option:
ff5dcc92 3199to make @command{ld} assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
252b5132
RH
3200output file is specified (@samp{-r}).
3201
4818e05f
AM
3202@item INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3203@kindex INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3204@cindex common allocation in linker script
3205This command has the same effect as the @samp{--no-define-common}
3206command-line option: to make @code{ld} omit the assignment of addresses
3207to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
3208
53d25da6
AM
3209@item INSERT [ AFTER | BEFORE ] @var{output_section}
3210@kindex INSERT
3211@cindex insert user script into default script
3212This command is typically used in a script specified by @samp{-T} to
3213augment the default @code{SECTIONS} with, for example, overlays. It
3214inserts all prior linker script statements after (or before)
3215@var{output_section}, and also causes @samp{-T} to not override the
3216default linker script. The exact insertion point is as for orphan
3217sections. @xref{Location Counter}. The insertion happens after the
3218linker has mapped input sections to output sections. Prior to the
3219insertion, since @samp{-T} scripts are parsed before the default
3220linker script, statements in the @samp{-T} script occur before the
3221default linker script statements in the internal linker representation
3222of the script. In particular, input section assignments will be made
3223to @samp{-T} output sections before those in the default script. Here
3224is an example of how a @samp{-T} script using @code{INSERT} might look:
3225
3226@smallexample
3227SECTIONS
3228@{
3229 OVERLAY :
3230 @{
3231 .ov1 @{ ov1*(.text) @}
3232 .ov2 @{ ov2*(.text) @}
3233 @}
3234@}
3235INSERT AFTER .text;
3236@end smallexample
3237
252b5132
RH
3238@item NOCROSSREFS(@var{section} @var{section} @dots{})
3239@kindex NOCROSSREFS(@var{sections})
3240@cindex cross references
ff5dcc92 3241This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
252b5132
RH
3242references among certain output sections.
3243
3244In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
3245using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another section
3246will not be. Any direct references between the two sections would be
3247errors. For example, it would be an error if code in one section called
3248a function defined in the other section.
3249
3250The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command takes a list of output section names. If
ff5dcc92 3251@command{ld} detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
252b5132
RH
3252an error and returns a non-zero exit status. Note that the
3253@code{NOCROSSREFS} command uses output section names, not input section
3254names.
3255
3256@ifclear SingleFormat
3257@item OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3258@kindex OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3259@cindex machine architecture
3260@cindex architecture
3261Specify a particular output machine architecture. The argument is one
3262of the names used by the BFD library (@pxref{BFD}). You can see the
3263architecture of an object file by using the @code{objdump} program with
3264the @samp{-f} option.
3265@end ifclear
3266@end table
3267
3268@node Assignments
3269@section Assigning Values to Symbols
3270@cindex assignment in scripts
3271@cindex symbol definition, scripts
3272@cindex variables, defining
3273You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script. This will define
73ae6183 3274the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.
252b5132
RH
3275
3276@menu
3277* Simple Assignments:: Simple Assignments
3278* PROVIDE:: PROVIDE
7af8e998 3279* PROVIDE_HIDDEN:: PROVIDE_HIDDEN
73ae6183 3280* Source Code Reference:: How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code
252b5132
RH
3281@end menu
3282
3283@node Simple Assignments
3284@subsection Simple Assignments
3285
3286You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
3287
3288@table @code
3289@item @var{symbol} = @var{expression} ;
3290@itemx @var{symbol} += @var{expression} ;
3291@itemx @var{symbol} -= @var{expression} ;
3292@itemx @var{symbol} *= @var{expression} ;
3293@itemx @var{symbol} /= @var{expression} ;
3294@itemx @var{symbol} <<= @var{expression} ;
3295@itemx @var{symbol} >>= @var{expression} ;
3296@itemx @var{symbol} &= @var{expression} ;
3297@itemx @var{symbol} |= @var{expression} ;
3298@end table
3299
3300The first case will define @var{symbol} to the value of
3301@var{expression}. In the other cases, @var{symbol} must already be
3302defined, and the value will be adjusted accordingly.
3303
3304The special symbol name @samp{.} indicates the location counter. You
b5666f2f 3305may only use this within a @code{SECTIONS} command. @xref{Location Counter}.
252b5132
RH
3306
3307The semicolon after @var{expression} is required.
3308
3309Expressions are defined below; see @ref{Expressions}.
3310
3311You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or as
3312statements within a @code{SECTIONS} command, or as part of an output
3313section description in a @code{SECTIONS} command.
3314
3315The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
3316expression; for more information, see @ref{Expression Section}.
3317
3318Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
3319assignments may be used:
3320
3321@smallexample
3322floating_point = 0;
3323SECTIONS
3324@{
3325 .text :
3326 @{
3327 *(.text)
3328 _etext = .;
3329 @}
156e34dd 3330 _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
252b5132
RH
3331 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3332@}
3333@end smallexample
3334@noindent
3335In this example, the symbol @samp{floating_point} will be defined as
3336zero. The symbol @samp{_etext} will be defined as the address following
3337the last @samp{.text} input section. The symbol @samp{_bdata} will be
3338defined as the address following the @samp{.text} output section aligned
3339upward to a 4 byte boundary.
3340
3341@node PROVIDE
3342@subsection PROVIDE
3343@cindex PROVIDE
3344In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
3345only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
3346the link. For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol
3347@samp{etext}. However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use
3348@samp{etext} as a function name without encountering an error. The
3349@code{PROVIDE} keyword may be used to define a symbol, such as
3350@samp{etext}, only if it is referenced but not defined. The syntax is
3351@code{PROVIDE(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3352
3353Here is an example of using @code{PROVIDE} to define @samp{etext}:
3354@smallexample
3355SECTIONS
3356@{
3357 .text :
3358 @{
3359 *(.text)
3360 _etext = .;
3361 PROVIDE(etext = .);
3362 @}
3363@}
3364@end smallexample
3365
3366In this example, if the program defines @samp{_etext} (with a leading
3367underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error. If, on
3368the other hand, the program defines @samp{etext} (with no leading
3369underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
3370If the program references @samp{etext} but does not define it, the
3371linker will use the definition in the linker script.
3372
7af8e998
L
3373@node PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3374@subsection PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3375@cindex PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3376Similar to @code{PROVIDE}. For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be
3377hidden and won't be exported.
3378
73ae6183
NC
3379@node Source Code Reference
3380@subsection Source Code Reference
3381
3382Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
3383intuitive. In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to
3384a variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a
3385symbol that does not have a value.
3386
3387Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
3388transform names in the source code into different names when they are
3389stored in the symbol table. For example, Fortran compilers commonly
3390prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive @samp{name
3391mangling}. Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name
3392of a variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same
3393variable as it is defined in a linker script. For example in C a
3394linker script variable might be referred to as:
3395
3396@smallexample
3397 extern int foo;
3398@end smallexample
3399
3400But in the linker script it might be defined as:
3401
3402@smallexample
3403 _foo = 1000;
3404@end smallexample
3405
3406In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
3407transformation has taken place.
3408
3409When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
3410things happen. The first is that the compiler reserves enough space
3411in the program's memory to hold the @emph{value} of the symbol. The
3412second is that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol
3413table which holds the symbol's @emph{address}. ie the symbol table
3414contains the address of the block of memory holding the symbol's
3415value. So for example the following C declaration, at file scope:
3416
3417@smallexample
3418 int foo = 1000;
3419@end smallexample
3420
3421creates a entry called @samp{foo} in the symbol table. This entry
3422holds the address of an @samp{int} sized block of memory where the
3423number 1000 is initially stored.
3424
3425When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
3426first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's
3427memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
3428So:
3429
3430@smallexample
3431 foo = 1;
3432@end smallexample
3433
3434looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets the address
3435associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
3436address. Whereas:
3437
3438@smallexample
3439 int * a = & foo;
3440@end smallexample
3441
3442looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets it address
3443and then copies this address into the block of memory associated with
3444the variable @samp{a}.
3445
3446Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
3447the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them. Thus they are
3448an address without a value. So for example the linker script definition:
3449
3450@smallexample
3451 foo = 1000;
3452@end smallexample
3453
3454creates an entry in the symbol table called @samp{foo} which holds
3455the address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
3456address 1000. This means that you cannot access the @emph{value} of a
3457linker script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is
3458access the @emph{address} of a linker script defined symbol.
3459
3460Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source code
3461you should always take the address of the symbol, and never attempt to
3462use its value. For example suppose you want to copy the contents of a
3463section of memory called .ROM into a section called .FLASH and the
3464linker script contains these declarations:
3465
3466@smallexample
3467@group
3468 start_of_ROM = .ROM;
3469 end_of_ROM = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM) - 1;
3470 start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;
3471@end group
3472@end smallexample
3473
3474Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:
3475
3476@smallexample
3477@group
3478 extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;
c0065db7 3479
73ae6183
NC
3480 memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);
3481@end group
3482@end smallexample
3483
3484Note the use of the @samp{&} operators. These are correct.
3485
252b5132 3486@node SECTIONS
36f63dca 3487@section SECTIONS Command
252b5132
RH
3488@kindex SECTIONS
3489The @code{SECTIONS} command tells the linker how to map input sections
3490into output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
3491
3492The format of the @code{SECTIONS} command is:
3493@smallexample
3494SECTIONS
3495@{
3496 @var{sections-command}
3497 @var{sections-command}
3498 @dots{}
3499@}
3500@end smallexample
3501
3502Each @var{sections-command} may of be one of the following:
3503
3504@itemize @bullet
3505@item
3506an @code{ENTRY} command (@pxref{Entry Point,,Entry command})
3507@item
3508a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
3509@item
3510an output section description
3511@item
3512an overlay description
3513@end itemize
3514
3515The @code{ENTRY} command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
3516@code{SECTIONS} command for convenience in using the location counter in
3517those commands. This can also make the linker script easier to
3518understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
3519the layout of the output file.
3520
3521Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
3522below.
3523
3524If you do not use a @code{SECTIONS} command in your linker script, the
3525linker will place each input section into an identically named output
3526section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
3527input files. If all input sections are present in the first file, for
3528example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
3529in the first input file. The first section will be at address zero.
3530
3531@menu
3532* Output Section Description:: Output section description
3533* Output Section Name:: Output section name
3534* Output Section Address:: Output section address
3535* Input Section:: Input section description
3536* Output Section Data:: Output section data
3537* Output Section Keywords:: Output section keywords
3538* Output Section Discarding:: Output section discarding
3539* Output Section Attributes:: Output section attributes
3540* Overlay Description:: Overlay description
3541@end menu
3542
3543@node Output Section Description
36f63dca 3544@subsection Output Section Description
252b5132
RH
3545The full description of an output section looks like this:
3546@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 3547@group
7e7d5768 3548@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
bbf115d3 3549 [AT(@var{lma})] [ALIGN(@var{section_align})] [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
252b5132
RH
3550 @{
3551 @var{output-section-command}
3552 @var{output-section-command}
3553 @dots{}
562d3460 3554 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
252b5132
RH
3555@end group
3556@end smallexample
3557
3558Most output sections do not use most of the optional section attributes.
3559
3560The whitespace around @var{section} is required, so that the section
3561name is unambiguous. The colon and the curly braces are also required.
3562The line breaks and other white space are optional.
3563
3564Each @var{output-section-command} may be one of the following:
3565
3566@itemize @bullet
3567@item
3568a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
3569@item
3570an input section description (@pxref{Input Section})
3571@item
3572data values to include directly (@pxref{Output Section Data})
3573@item
3574a special output section keyword (@pxref{Output Section Keywords})
3575@end itemize
3576
3577@node Output Section Name
36f63dca 3578@subsection Output Section Name
252b5132
RH
3579@cindex name, section
3580@cindex section name
3581The name of the output section is @var{section}. @var{section} must
3582meet the constraints of your output format. In formats which only
3583support a limited number of sections, such as @code{a.out}, the name
3584must be one of the names supported by the format (@code{a.out}, for
3585example, allows only @samp{.text}, @samp{.data} or @samp{.bss}). If the
3586output format supports any number of sections, but with numbers and not
3587names (as is the case for Oasys), the name should be supplied as a
3588quoted numeric string. A section name may consist of any sequence of
3589characters, but a name which contains any unusual characters such as
3590commas must be quoted.
3591
3592The output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} is special; @ref{Output Section
3593Discarding}.
3594
3595@node Output Section Address
2a16d82a 3596@subsection Output Section Address
252b5132
RH
3597@cindex address, section
3598@cindex section address
3599The @var{address} is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory
3600address) of the output section. If you do not provide @var{address},
3601the linker will set it based on @var{region} if present, or otherwise
3602based on the current value of the location counter.
3603
3604If you provide @var{address}, the address of the output section will be
3605set to precisely that. If you provide neither @var{address} nor
3606@var{region}, then the address of the output section will be set to the
3607current value of the location counter aligned to the alignment
3608requirements of the output section. The alignment requirement of the
3609output section is the strictest alignment of any input section contained
3610within the output section.
3611
3612For example,
3613@smallexample
3614.text . : @{ *(.text) @}
3615@end smallexample
3616@noindent
3617and
3618@smallexample
3619.text : @{ *(.text) @}
3620@end smallexample
3621@noindent
3622are subtly different. The first will set the address of the
3623@samp{.text} output section to the current value of the location
3624counter. The second will set it to the current value of the location
3625counter aligned to the strictest alignment of a @samp{.text} input
3626section.
3627
3628The @var{address} may be an arbitrary expression; @ref{Expressions}.
3629For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary,
3630so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could
3631do something like this:
3632@smallexample
3633.text ALIGN(0x10) : @{ *(.text) @}
3634@end smallexample
3635@noindent
3636This works because @code{ALIGN} returns the current location counter
3637aligned upward to the specified value.
3638
3639Specifying @var{address} for a section will change the value of the
3640location counter.
3641
3642@node Input Section
36f63dca 3643@subsection Input Section Description
252b5132
RH
3644@cindex input sections
3645@cindex mapping input sections to output sections
3646The most common output section command is an input section description.
3647
3648The input section description is the most basic linker script operation.
3649You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out your program
3650in memory. You use input section descriptions to tell the linker how to
3651map the input files into your memory layout.
3652
3653@menu
3654* Input Section Basics:: Input section basics
3655* Input Section Wildcards:: Input section wildcard patterns
3656* Input Section Common:: Input section for common symbols
3657* Input Section Keep:: Input section and garbage collection
3658* Input Section Example:: Input section example
3659@end menu
3660
3661@node Input Section Basics
36f63dca 3662@subsubsection Input Section Basics
252b5132
RH
3663@cindex input section basics
3664An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
3665by a list of section names in parentheses.
3666
3667The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
3668describe further below (@pxref{Input Section Wildcards}).
3669
3670The most common input section description is to include all input
3671sections with a particular name in the output section. For example, to
3672include all input @samp{.text} sections, you would write:
3673@smallexample
3674*(.text)
3675@end smallexample
3676@noindent
18625d54
CM
3677Here the @samp{*} is a wildcard which matches any file name. To exclude a list
3678of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may be used to
3679match all files except the ones specified in the EXCLUDE_FILE list. For
3680example:
252b5132 3681@smallexample
b4346c09 3682*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors)
252b5132 3683@end smallexample
765b7cbe
JB
3684will cause all .ctors sections from all files except @file{crtend.o} and
3685@file{otherfile.o} to be included.
252b5132
RH
3686
3687There are two ways to include more than one section:
3688@smallexample
3689*(.text .rdata)
3690*(.text) *(.rdata)
3691@end smallexample
3692@noindent
3693The difference between these is the order in which the @samp{.text} and
3694@samp{.rdata} input sections will appear in the output section. In the
b6bf44ba
AM
3695first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as
3696they are found in the linker input. In the second example, all
252b5132
RH
3697@samp{.text} input sections will appear first, followed by all
3698@samp{.rdata} input sections.
3699
3700You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular file.
3701You would do this if one or more of your files contain special data that
3702needs to be at a particular location in memory. For example:
3703@smallexample
3704data.o(.data)
3705@end smallexample
3706
967928e9
AM
3707You can also specify files within archives by writing a pattern
3708matching the archive, a colon, then the pattern matching the file,
3709with no whitespace around the colon.
3710
3711@table @samp
3712@item archive:file
3713matches file within archive
3714@item archive:
3715matches the whole archive
3716@item :file
3717matches file but not one in an archive
3718@end table
3719
3720Either one or both of @samp{archive} and @samp{file} can contain shell
3721wildcards. On DOS based file systems, the linker will assume that a
3722single letter followed by a colon is a drive specifier, so
3723@samp{c:myfile.o} is a simple file specification, not @samp{myfile.o}
3724within an archive called @samp{c}. @samp{archive:file} filespecs may
3725also be used within an @code{EXCLUDE_FILE} list, but may not appear in
3726other linker script contexts. For instance, you cannot extract a file
3727from an archive by using @samp{archive:file} in an @code{INPUT}
3728command.
3729
252b5132
RH
3730If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections in
3731the input file will be included in the output section. This is not
3732commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion. For example:
3733@smallexample
3734data.o
3735@end smallexample
3736
967928e9
AM
3737When you use a file name which is not an @samp{archive:file} specifier
3738and does not contain any wild card
252b5132
RH
3739characters, the linker will first see if you also specified the file
3740name on the linker command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. If you
3741did not, the linker will attempt to open the file as an input file, as
3742though it appeared on the command line. Note that this differs from an
3743@code{INPUT} command, because the linker will not search for the file in
3744the archive search path.
3745
3746@node Input Section Wildcards
36f63dca 3747@subsubsection Input Section Wildcard Patterns
252b5132
RH
3748@cindex input section wildcards
3749@cindex wildcard file name patterns
3750@cindex file name wildcard patterns
3751@cindex section name wildcard patterns
3752In an input section description, either the file name or the section
3753name or both may be wildcard patterns.
3754
3755The file name of @samp{*} seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
3756pattern for the file name.
3757
3758The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
3759
3760@table @samp
3761@item *
3762matches any number of characters
3763@item ?
3764matches any single character
3765@item [@var{chars}]
3766matches a single instance of any of the @var{chars}; the @samp{-}
3767character may be used to specify a range of characters, as in
3768@samp{[a-z]} to match any lower case letter
3769@item \
3770quotes the following character
3771@end table
3772
3773When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
3774will not match a @samp{/} character (used to separate directory names on
3775Unix). A pattern consisting of a single @samp{*} character is an
3776exception; it will always match any file name, whether it contains a
3777@samp{/} or not. In a section name, the wildcard characters will match
3778a @samp{/} character.
3779
3780File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
3781specified on the command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. The linker
3782does not search directories to expand wildcards.
3783
3784If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file name
3785appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the linker
3786will use the first match in the linker script. For example, this
3787sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
3788@file{data.o} rule will not be used:
3789@smallexample
3790.data : @{ *(.data) @}
3791.data1 : @{ data.o(.data) @}
3792@end smallexample
3793
bcaa7b3e 3794@cindex SORT_BY_NAME
252b5132
RH
3795Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by wildcards
3796in the order in which they are seen during the link. You can change
bcaa7b3e
L
3797this by using the @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword, which appears before a wildcard
3798pattern in parentheses (e.g., @code{SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)}). When the
3799@code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or sections
252b5132
RH
3800into ascending order by name before placing them in the output file.
3801
bcaa7b3e
L
3802@cindex SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT
3803@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
3804difference is @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} will sort sections into
3805ascending order by alignment before placing them in the output file.
3806
3807@cindex SORT
3808@code{SORT} is an alias for @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
3809
3810When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script, there
3811can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.
3812
3813@enumerate
3814@item
3815@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
3816It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment if 2
3817sections have the same name.
3818@item
3819@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
3820It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name if 2
3821sections have the same alignment.
3822@item
c0065db7 3823@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)) is
bcaa7b3e
L
3824treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern).
3825@item
3826@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern))
3827is treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern).
3828@item
3829All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.
3830@end enumerate
3831
3832When both command line section sorting option and linker script
3833section sorting command are used, section sorting command always
3834takes precedence over the command line option.
3835
3836If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the
3837command line option will make the section sorting command to be
3838treated as nested sorting command.
3839
3840@enumerate
3841@item
3842@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern ) with
3843@option{--sort-sections alignment} is equivalent to
3844@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
3845@item
3846@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern) with
3847@option{--sort-section name} is equivalent to
3848@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
3849@end enumerate
3850
3851If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
3852command line option will be ignored.
3853
252b5132
RH
3854If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use the
3855@samp{-M} linker option to generate a map file. The map file shows
3856precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
3857
3858This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
3859files. This linker script directs the linker to place all @samp{.text}
3860sections in @samp{.text} and all @samp{.bss} sections in @samp{.bss}.
3861The linker will place the @samp{.data} section from all files beginning
3862with an upper case character in @samp{.DATA}; for all other files, the
3863linker will place the @samp{.data} section in @samp{.data}.
3864@smallexample
3865@group
3866SECTIONS @{
3867 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
3868 .DATA : @{ [A-Z]*(.data) @}
3869 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3870 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
3871@}
3872@end group
3873@end smallexample
3874
3875@node Input Section Common
36f63dca 3876@subsubsection Input Section for Common Symbols
252b5132
RH
3877@cindex common symbol placement
3878@cindex uninitialized data placement
3879A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
3880file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section. The
3881linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
3882named @samp{COMMON}.
3883
3884You may use file names with the @samp{COMMON} section just as with any
3885other input sections. You can use this to place common symbols from a
3886particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
3887input files are placed in another section.
3888
3889In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
3890@samp{.bss} section in the output file. For example:
3891@smallexample
3892.bss @{ *(.bss) *(COMMON) @}
3893@end smallexample
3894
3895@cindex scommon section
3896@cindex small common symbols
3897Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol. For
3898example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard common
3899symbols and small common symbols. In this case, the linker will use a
3900different special section name for other types of common symbols. In
3901the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses @samp{COMMON} for standard common
3902symbols and @samp{.scommon} for small common symbols. This permits you
3903to map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
3904locations.
3905
3906@cindex [COMMON]
3907You will sometimes see @samp{[COMMON]} in old linker scripts. This
3908notation is now considered obsolete. It is equivalent to
3909@samp{*(COMMON)}.
3910
3911@node Input Section Keep
36f63dca 3912@subsubsection Input Section and Garbage Collection
252b5132
RH
3913@cindex KEEP
3914@cindex garbage collection
3915When link-time garbage collection is in use (@samp{--gc-sections}),
a1ab1d2a 3916it is often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated.
252b5132
RH
3917This is accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry
3918with @code{KEEP()}, as in @code{KEEP(*(.init))} or
bcaa7b3e 3919@code{KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))}.
252b5132
RH
3920
3921@node Input Section Example
36f63dca 3922@subsubsection Input Section Example
252b5132
RH
3923The following example is a complete linker script. It tells the linker
3924to read all of the sections from file @file{all.o} and place them at the
3925start of output section @samp{outputa} which starts at location
3926@samp{0x10000}. All of section @samp{.input1} from file @file{foo.o}
3927follows immediately, in the same output section. All of section
3928@samp{.input2} from @file{foo.o} goes into output section
3929@samp{outputb}, followed by section @samp{.input1} from @file{foo1.o}.
3930All of the remaining @samp{.input1} and @samp{.input2} sections from any
3931files are written to output section @samp{outputc}.
3932
3933@smallexample
3934@group
3935SECTIONS @{
3936 outputa 0x10000 :
3937 @{
3938 all.o
3939 foo.o (.input1)
3940 @}
36f63dca
NC
3941@end group
3942@group
252b5132
RH
3943 outputb :
3944 @{
3945 foo.o (.input2)
3946 foo1.o (.input1)
3947 @}
36f63dca
NC
3948@end group
3949@group
252b5132
RH
3950 outputc :
3951 @{
3952 *(.input1)
3953 *(.input2)
3954 @}
3955@}
3956@end group
a1ab1d2a 3957@end smallexample
252b5132
RH
3958
3959@node Output Section Data
36f63dca 3960@subsection Output Section Data
252b5132
RH
3961@cindex data
3962@cindex section data
3963@cindex output section data
3964@kindex BYTE(@var{expression})
3965@kindex SHORT(@var{expression})
3966@kindex LONG(@var{expression})
3967@kindex QUAD(@var{expression})
3968@kindex SQUAD(@var{expression})
3969You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
3970@code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, @code{QUAD}, or @code{SQUAD} as
3971an output section command. Each keyword is followed by an expression in
3972parentheses providing the value to store (@pxref{Expressions}). The
3973value of the expression is stored at the current value of the location
3974counter.
3975
3976The @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, and @code{QUAD} commands
3977store one, two, four, and eight bytes (respectively). After storing the
3978bytes, the location counter is incremented by the number of bytes
3979stored.
3980
3981For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte value
3982of the symbol @samp{addr}:
3983@smallexample
3984BYTE(1)
3985LONG(addr)
3986@end smallexample
3987
3988When using a 64 bit host or target, @code{QUAD} and @code{SQUAD} are the
3989same; they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value. When both host and
3990target are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits. In this case
3991@code{QUAD} stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and
3992@code{SQUAD} stores a 32 bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
3993
3994If the object file format of the output file has an explicit endianness,
3995which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that endianness.
3996When the object file format does not have an explicit endianness, as is
3997true of, for example, S-records, the value will be stored in the
3998endianness of the first input object file.
3999
36f63dca 4000Note---these commands only work inside a section description and not
2b5fc1f5
NC
4001between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
4002@smallexample
4003SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) @}@ LONG(1) .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4004@end smallexample
4005whereas this will work:
4006@smallexample
4007SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) ; LONG(1) @}@ .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4008@end smallexample
4009
252b5132
RH
4010@kindex FILL(@var{expression})
4011@cindex holes, filling
4012@cindex unspecified memory
4013You may use the @code{FILL} command to set the fill pattern for the
4014current section. It is followed by an expression in parentheses. Any
4015otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
4016gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
a139d329 4017with the value of the expression, repeated as
252b5132
RH
4018necessary. A @code{FILL} statement covers memory locations after the
4019point at which it occurs in the section definition; by including more
4020than one @code{FILL} statement, you can have different fill patterns in
4021different parts of an output section.
4022
4023This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
563e308f 4024value @samp{0x90}:
252b5132 4025@smallexample
563e308f 4026FILL(0x90909090)
252b5132
RH
4027@end smallexample
4028
4029The @code{FILL} command is similar to the @samp{=@var{fillexp}} output
9673c93c 4030section attribute, but it only affects the
252b5132
RH
4031part of the section following the @code{FILL} command, rather than the
4032entire section. If both are used, the @code{FILL} command takes
9673c93c 4033precedence. @xref{Output Section Fill}, for details on the fill
a139d329 4034expression.
252b5132
RH
4035
4036@node Output Section Keywords
36f63dca 4037@subsection Output Section Keywords
252b5132
RH
4038There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
4039commands.
4040
4041@table @code
4042@kindex CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4043@cindex input filename symbols
4044@cindex filename symbols
4045@item CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4046The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input file.
4047The name of each symbol will be the name of the corresponding input
4048file. The section of each symbol will be the output section in which
4049the @code{CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS} command appears.
4050
4051This is conventional for the a.out object file format. It is not
4052normally used for any other object file format.
4053
4054@kindex CONSTRUCTORS
4055@cindex C++ constructors, arranging in link
4056@cindex constructors, arranging in link
4057@item CONSTRUCTORS
4058When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
4059unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
4060destructors. When linking object file formats which do not support
4061arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
4062automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by name.
4063For these object file formats, the @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command tells the
4064linker to place constructor information in the output section where the
4065@code{CONSTRUCTORS} command appears. The @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command is
4066ignored for other object file formats.
4067
4068The symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_LIST__}} marks the start of the global
7e69709c
AM
4069constructors, and the symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_END__}} marks the end.
4070Similarly, @w{@code{__DTOR_LIST__}} and @w{@code{__DTOR_END__}} mark
4071the start and end of the global destructors. The
252b5132
RH
4072first word in the list is the number of entries, followed by the address
4073of each constructor or destructor, followed by a zero word. The
4074compiler must arrange to actually run the code. For these object file
4075formats @sc{gnu} C++ normally calls constructors from a subroutine
4076@code{__main}; a call to @code{__main} is automatically inserted into
4077the startup code for @code{main}. @sc{gnu} C++ normally runs
4078destructors either by using @code{atexit}, or directly from the function
4079@code{exit}.
4080
4081For object file formats such as @code{COFF} or @code{ELF} which support
4082arbitrary section names, @sc{gnu} C++ will normally arrange to put the
4083addresses of global constructors and destructors into the @code{.ctors}
4084and @code{.dtors} sections. Placing the following sequence into your
4085linker script will build the sort of table which the @sc{gnu} C++
4086runtime code expects to see.
4087
4088@smallexample
4089 __CTOR_LIST__ = .;
4090 LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4091 *(.ctors)
4092 LONG(0)
4093 __CTOR_END__ = .;
4094 __DTOR_LIST__ = .;
4095 LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4096 *(.dtors)
4097 LONG(0)
4098 __DTOR_END__ = .;
4099@end smallexample
4100
4101If you are using the @sc{gnu} C++ support for initialization priority,
4102which provides some control over the order in which global constructors
4103are run, you must sort the constructors at link time to ensure that they
4104are executed in the correct order. When using the @code{CONSTRUCTORS}
bcaa7b3e
L
4105command, use @samp{SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)} instead. When using the
4106@code{.ctors} and @code{.dtors} sections, use @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))} and
4107@samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))} instead of just @samp{*(.ctors)} and
252b5132
RH
4108@samp{*(.dtors)}.
4109
4110Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues automatically,
4111and you will not need to concern yourself with them. However, you may
4112need to consider this if you are using C++ and writing your own linker
4113scripts.
4114
4115@end table
4116
4117@node Output Section Discarding
36f63dca 4118@subsection Output Section Discarding
252b5132
RH
4119@cindex discarding sections
4120@cindex sections, discarding
4121@cindex removing sections
74541ad4
AM
4122The linker will not create output sections with no contents. This is
4123for convenience when referring to input sections that may or may not
4124be present in any of the input files. For example:
252b5132 4125@smallexample
49c13adb 4126.foo : @{ *(.foo) @}
252b5132
RH
4127@end smallexample
4128@noindent
4129will only create a @samp{.foo} section in the output file if there is a
74541ad4
AM
4130@samp{.foo} section in at least one input file, and if the input
4131sections are not all empty. Other link script directives that allocate
4132space in an output section will also create the output section.
4133
a0976ea4 4134The linker will ignore address assignments (@pxref{Output Section Address})
74541ad4
AM
4135on discarded output sections, except when the linker script defines
4136symbols in the output section. In that case the linker will obey
a0976ea4
AM
4137the address assignments, possibly advancing dot even though the
4138section is discarded.
252b5132
RH
4139
4140@cindex /DISCARD/
4141The special output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} may be used to discard
4142input sections. Any input sections which are assigned to an output
4143section named @samp{/DISCARD/} are not included in the output file.
4144
4145@node Output Section Attributes
36f63dca 4146@subsection Output Section Attributes
252b5132
RH
4147@cindex output section attributes
4148We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
4149like this:
4150@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 4151@group
7e7d5768 4152@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
bbf115d3 4153 [AT(@var{lma})] [ALIGN(@var{section_align})] [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
252b5132
RH
4154 @{
4155 @var{output-section-command}
4156 @var{output-section-command}
4157 @dots{}
562d3460 4158 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
252b5132
RH
4159@end group
4160@end smallexample
4161We've already described @var{section}, @var{address}, and
4162@var{output-section-command}. In this section we will describe the
4163remaining section attributes.
4164
a1ab1d2a 4165@menu
252b5132
RH
4166* Output Section Type:: Output section type
4167* Output Section LMA:: Output section LMA
bbf115d3 4168* Forced Output Alignment:: Forced Output Alignment
7e7d5768 4169* Forced Input Alignment:: Forced Input Alignment
252b5132
RH
4170* Output Section Region:: Output section region
4171* Output Section Phdr:: Output section phdr
4172* Output Section Fill:: Output section fill
4173@end menu
4174
4175@node Output Section Type
36f63dca 4176@subsubsection Output Section Type
252b5132
RH
4177Each output section may have a type. The type is a keyword in
4178parentheses. The following types are defined:
4179
4180@table @code
4181@item NOLOAD
4182The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not be
4183loaded into memory when the program is run.
4184@item DSECT
4185@itemx COPY
4186@itemx INFO
4187@itemx OVERLAY
4188These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
4189rarely used. They all have the same effect: the section should be
4190marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
4191section when the program is run.
4192@end table
4193
4194@kindex NOLOAD
4195@cindex prevent unnecessary loading
4196@cindex loading, preventing
4197The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
4198the input sections which map into it. You can override this by using
4199the section type. For example, in the script sample below, the
4200@samp{ROM} section is addressed at memory location @samp{0} and does not
4201need to be loaded when the program is run. The contents of the
4202@samp{ROM} section will appear in the linker output file as usual.
4203@smallexample
4204@group
4205SECTIONS @{
4206 ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : @{ @dots{} @}
4207 @dots{}
4208@}
4209@end group
4210@end smallexample
4211
4212@node Output Section LMA
36f63dca 4213@subsubsection Output Section LMA
562d3460 4214@kindex AT>@var{lma_region}
252b5132
RH
4215@kindex AT(@var{lma})
4216@cindex load address
4217@cindex section load address
4218Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
4219@ref{Basic Script Concepts}. The address expression which may appear in
4220an output section description sets the VMA (@pxref{Output Section
4221Address}).
4222
dc0b6aa0
AM
4223The expression @var{lma} that follows the @code{AT} keyword specifies
4224the load address of the section.
6bdafbeb
NC
4225
4226Alternatively, with @samp{AT>@var{lma_region}} expression, you may
4227specify a memory region for the section's load address. @xref{MEMORY}.
4228Note that if the section has not had a VMA assigned to it then the
4229linker will use the @var{lma_region} as the VMA region as well.
dc0b6aa0
AM
4230
4231If neither @code{AT} nor @code{AT>} is specified for an allocatable
4232section, the linker will set the LMA such that the difference between
4233VMA and LMA for the section is the same as the preceding output
4234section in the same region. If there is no preceding output section
4235or the section is not allocatable, the linker will set the LMA equal
4236to the VMA.
6bdafbeb 4237@xref{Output Section Region}.
252b5132
RH
4238
4239@cindex ROM initialized data
4240@cindex initialized data in ROM
4241This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image. For
4242example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
4243called @samp{.text}, which starts at @code{0x1000}, one called
4244@samp{.mdata}, which is loaded at the end of the @samp{.text} section
4245even though its VMA is @code{0x2000}, and one called @samp{.bss} to hold
4246uninitialized data at address @code{0x3000}. The symbol @code{_data} is
4247defined with the value @code{0x2000}, which shows that the location
4248counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
4249
4250@smallexample
4251@group
4252SECTIONS
4253 @{
4254 .text 0x1000 : @{ *(.text) _etext = . ; @}
a1ab1d2a 4255 .mdata 0x2000 :
252b5132
RH
4256 AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
4257 @{ _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ; @}
4258 .bss 0x3000 :
4259 @{ _bstart = . ; *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;@}
4260@}
4261@end group
4262@end smallexample
4263
4264The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated with
4265this linker script would include something like the following, to copy
4266the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address. Notice
4267how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the linker
4268script.
4269
4270@smallexample
4271@group
4272extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
4273char *src = &_etext;
4274char *dst = &_data;
4275
4276/* ROM has data at end of text; copy it. */
4277while (dst < &_edata) @{
4278 *dst++ = *src++;
4279@}
4280
4281/* Zero bss */
4282for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
4283 *dst = 0;
4284@end group
4285@end smallexample
4286
bbf115d3
L
4287@node Forced Output Alignment
4288@subsubsection Forced Output Alignment
4289@kindex ALIGN(@var{section_align})
4290@cindex forcing output section alignment
4291@cindex output section alignment
7270c5ed 4292You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN.
bbf115d3 4293
7e7d5768
AM
4294@node Forced Input Alignment
4295@subsubsection Forced Input Alignment
4296@kindex SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})
4297@cindex forcing input section alignment
4298@cindex input section alignment
4299You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
4300SUBALIGN. The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
4301sections, whether larger or smaller.
4302
252b5132 4303@node Output Section Region
36f63dca 4304@subsubsection Output Section Region
252b5132
RH
4305@kindex >@var{region}
4306@cindex section, assigning to memory region
4307@cindex memory regions and sections
4308You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
4309using @samp{>@var{region}}. @xref{MEMORY}.
4310
4311Here is a simple example:
4312@smallexample
4313@group
4314MEMORY @{ rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 @}
4315SECTIONS @{ ROM : @{ *(.text) @} >rom @}
4316@end group
4317@end smallexample
4318
4319@node Output Section Phdr
36f63dca 4320@subsubsection Output Section Phdr
252b5132
RH
4321@kindex :@var{phdr}
4322@cindex section, assigning to program header
4323@cindex program headers and sections
4324You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
4325using @samp{:@var{phdr}}. @xref{PHDRS}. If a section is assigned to
4326one or more segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be
4327assigned to those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly
4328@code{:@var{phdr}} modifier. You can use @code{:NONE} to tell the
4329linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
4330
4331Here is a simple example:
4332@smallexample
4333@group
4334PHDRS @{ text PT_LOAD ; @}
4335SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text @}
4336@end group
4337@end smallexample
4338
4339@node Output Section Fill
36f63dca 4340@subsubsection Output Section Fill
252b5132
RH
4341@kindex =@var{fillexp}
4342@cindex section fill pattern
4343@cindex fill pattern, entire section
4344You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using
4345@samp{=@var{fillexp}}. @var{fillexp} is an expression
4346(@pxref{Expressions}). Any otherwise unspecified regions of memory
4347within the output section (for example, gaps left due to the required
a139d329
AM
4348alignment of input sections) will be filled with the value, repeated as
4349necessary. If the fill expression is a simple hex number, ie. a string
9673c93c 4350of hex digit starting with @samp{0x} and without a trailing @samp{k} or @samp{M}, then
a139d329
AM
4351an arbitrarily long sequence of hex digits can be used to specify the
4352fill pattern; Leading zeros become part of the pattern too. For all
9673c93c 4353other cases, including extra parentheses or a unary @code{+}, the fill
a139d329
AM
4354pattern is the four least significant bytes of the value of the
4355expression. In all cases, the number is big-endian.
252b5132
RH
4356
4357You can also change the fill value with a @code{FILL} command in the
9673c93c 4358output section commands; (@pxref{Output Section Data}).
252b5132
RH
4359
4360Here is a simple example:
4361@smallexample
4362@group
563e308f 4363SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} =0x90909090 @}
252b5132
RH
4364@end group
4365@end smallexample
4366
4367@node Overlay Description
36f63dca 4368@subsection Overlay Description
252b5132
RH
4369@kindex OVERLAY
4370@cindex overlays
4371An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
4372are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
4373the same memory address. At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
4374copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
4375required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits. This approach
4376can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
4377than another.
4378
4379Overlays are described using the @code{OVERLAY} command. The
4380@code{OVERLAY} command is used within a @code{SECTIONS} command, like an
4381output section description. The full syntax of the @code{OVERLAY}
4382command is as follows:
4383@smallexample
4384@group
4385OVERLAY [@var{start}] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( @var{ldaddr} )]
4386 @{
4387 @var{secname1}
4388 @{
4389 @var{output-section-command}
4390 @var{output-section-command}
4391 @dots{}
4392 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4393 @var{secname2}
4394 @{
4395 @var{output-section-command}
4396 @var{output-section-command}
4397 @dots{}
4398 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4399 @dots{}
4400 @} [>@var{region}] [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4401@end group
4402@end smallexample
4403
4404Everything is optional except @code{OVERLAY} (a keyword), and each
4405section must have a name (@var{secname1} and @var{secname2} above). The
4406section definitions within the @code{OVERLAY} construct are identical to
4407those within the general @code{SECTIONS} contruct (@pxref{SECTIONS}),
4408except that no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for
4409sections within an @code{OVERLAY}.
4410
4411The sections are all defined with the same starting address. The load
4412addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are consecutive in
4413memory starting at the load address used for the @code{OVERLAY} as a
4414whole (as with normal section definitions, the load address is optional,
4415and defaults to the start address; the start address is also optional,
4416and defaults to the current value of the location counter).
4417
4418If the @code{NOCROSSREFS} keyword is used, and there any references
4419among the sections, the linker will report an error. Since the sections
4420all run at the same address, it normally does not make sense for one
4421section to refer directly to another. @xref{Miscellaneous Commands,
4422NOCROSSREFS}.
4423
4424For each section within the @code{OVERLAY}, the linker automatically
34711ca3 4425provides two symbols. The symbol @code{__load_start_@var{secname}} is
252b5132
RH
4426defined as the starting load address of the section. The symbol
4427@code{__load_stop_@var{secname}} is defined as the final load address of
4428the section. Any characters within @var{secname} which are not legal
4429within C identifiers are removed. C (or assembler) code may use these
4430symbols to move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
4431
4432At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set to
4433the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest section.
4434
4435Here is an example. Remember that this would appear inside a
4436@code{SECTIONS} construct.
4437@smallexample
4438@group
4439 OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
4440 @{
4441 .text0 @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
4442 .text1 @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
4443 @}
4444@end group
4445@end smallexample
4446@noindent
4447This will define both @samp{.text0} and @samp{.text1} to start at
4448address 0x1000. @samp{.text0} will be loaded at address 0x4000, and
4449@samp{.text1} will be loaded immediately after @samp{.text0}. The
34711ca3 4450following symbols will be defined if referenced: @code{__load_start_text0},
252b5132
RH
4451@code{__load_stop_text0}, @code{__load_start_text1},
4452@code{__load_stop_text1}.
4453
4454C code to copy overlay @code{.text1} into the overlay area might look
4455like the following.
4456
4457@smallexample
4458@group
4459 extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
4460 memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
4461 &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
4462@end group
4463@end smallexample
4464
4465Note that the @code{OVERLAY} command is just syntactic sugar, since
4466everything it does can be done using the more basic commands. The above
4467example could have been written identically as follows.
4468
4469@smallexample
4470@group
4471 .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
4472 PROVIDE (__load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0));
4473 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0));
252b5132 4474 .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
4475 PROVIDE (__load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1));
4476 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1));
252b5132
RH
4477 . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
4478@end group
4479@end smallexample
4480
4481@node MEMORY
36f63dca 4482@section MEMORY Command
252b5132
RH
4483@kindex MEMORY
4484@cindex memory regions
4485@cindex regions of memory
4486@cindex allocating memory
4487@cindex discontinuous memory
4488The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
4489memory. You can override this by using the @code{MEMORY} command.
4490
4491The @code{MEMORY} command describes the location and size of blocks of
4492memory in the target. You can use it to describe which memory regions
4493may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid. You
4494can then assign sections to particular memory regions. The linker will
4495set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
4496regions that become too full. The linker will not shuffle sections
4497around to fit into the available regions.
4498
4499A linker script may contain at most one use of the @code{MEMORY}
4500command. However, you can define as many blocks of memory within it as
4501you wish. The syntax is:
4502@smallexample
4503@group
a1ab1d2a 4504MEMORY
252b5132
RH
4505 @{
4506 @var{name} [(@var{attr})] : ORIGIN = @var{origin}, LENGTH = @var{len}
4507 @dots{}
4508 @}
4509@end group
4510@end smallexample
4511
4512The @var{name} is a name used in the linker script to refer to the
4513region. The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script.
4514Region names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
4515with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each memory region
4a93e180
NC
4516must have a distinct name within the @code{MEMORY} command. However you can
4517add later alias names to existing memory regions with the @ref{REGION_ALIAS}
4518command.
252b5132
RH
4519
4520@cindex memory region attributes
4521The @var{attr} string is an optional list of attributes that specify
4522whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
4523not explicitly mapped in the linker script. As described in
4524@ref{SECTIONS}, if you do not specify an output section for some input
4525section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
4526the input section. If you define region attributes, the linker will use
4527them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
4528
4529The @var{attr} string must consist only of the following characters:
4530@table @samp
4531@item R
4532Read-only section
4533@item W
4534Read/write section
4535@item X
4536Executable section
4537@item A
4538Allocatable section
4539@item I
4540Initialized section
4541@item L
4542Same as @samp{I}
4543@item !
4544Invert the sense of any of the preceding attributes
4545@end table
4546
4547If a unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
4548@samp{!}, it will be placed in the memory region. The @samp{!}
4549attribute reverses this test, so that an unmapped section will be placed
4550in the memory region only if it does not match any of the listed
4551attributes.
4552
4553@kindex ORIGIN =
4554@kindex o =
4555@kindex org =
9cd6d51a
NC
4556The @var{origin} is an numerical expression for the start address of
4557the memory region. The expression must evaluate to a constant and it
4558cannot involve any symbols. The keyword @code{ORIGIN} may be
4559abbreviated to @code{org} or @code{o} (but not, for example,
4560@code{ORG}).
252b5132
RH
4561
4562@kindex LENGTH =
4563@kindex len =
4564@kindex l =
4565The @var{len} is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory
4566region. As with the @var{origin} expression, the expression must
9cd6d51a
NC
4567be numerical only and must evaluate to a constant. The keyword
4568@code{LENGTH} may be abbreviated to @code{len} or @code{l}.
252b5132
RH
4569
4570In the following example, we specify that there are two memory regions
4571available for allocation: one starting at @samp{0} for 256 kilobytes,
4572and the other starting at @samp{0x40000000} for four megabytes. The
4573linker will place into the @samp{rom} memory region every section which
4574is not explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only
4575or executable. The linker will place other sections which are not
4576explicitly mapped into a memory region into the @samp{ram} memory
4577region.
4578
4579@smallexample
4580@group
a1ab1d2a 4581MEMORY
252b5132
RH
4582 @{
4583 rom (rx) : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
4584 ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
4585 @}
4586@end group
4587@end smallexample
4588
4589Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
4590specific output sections into that memory region by using the
4591@samp{>@var{region}} output section attribute. For example, if you have
4592a memory region named @samp{mem}, you would use @samp{>mem} in the
4593output section definition. @xref{Output Section Region}. If no address
4594was specified for the output section, the linker will set the address to
4595the next available address within the memory region. If the combined
4596output sections directed to a memory region are too large for the
4597region, the linker will issue an error message.
4598
3ec57632 4599It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
c0065db7 4600expression via the @code{ORIGIN(@var{memory})} and
3ec57632
NC
4601@code{LENGTH(@var{memory})} functions:
4602
4603@smallexample
4604@group
c0065db7 4605 _fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;
3ec57632
NC
4606@end group
4607@end smallexample
4608
252b5132
RH
4609@node PHDRS
4610@section PHDRS Command
4611@kindex PHDRS
4612@cindex program headers
4613@cindex ELF program headers
4614@cindex program segments
4615@cindex segments, ELF
4616The ELF object file format uses @dfn{program headers}, also knows as
4617@dfn{segments}. The program headers describe how the program should be
4618loaded into memory. You can print them out by using the @code{objdump}
4619program with the @samp{-p} option.
4620
4621When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
4622reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
4623program. This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
4624This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
4625interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
4626
4627The linker will create reasonable program headers by default. However,
4628in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
4629precisely. You may use the @code{PHDRS} command for this purpose. When
4630the linker sees the @code{PHDRS} command in the linker script, it will
4631not create any program headers other than the ones specified.
4632
4633The linker only pays attention to the @code{PHDRS} command when
4634generating an ELF output file. In other cases, the linker will simply
4635ignore @code{PHDRS}.
4636
4637This is the syntax of the @code{PHDRS} command. The words @code{PHDRS},
4638@code{FILEHDR}, @code{AT}, and @code{FLAGS} are keywords.
4639
4640@smallexample
4641@group
4642PHDRS
4643@{
4644 @var{name} @var{type} [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( @var{address} ) ]
4645 [ FLAGS ( @var{flags} ) ] ;
4646@}
4647@end group
4648@end smallexample
4649
4650The @var{name} is used only for reference in the @code{SECTIONS} command
4651of the linker script. It is not put into the output file. Program
4652header names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
4653with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each program header
4654must have a distinct name.
4655
4656Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
4657system loader will load from the file. In the linker script, you
4658specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
4659sections in the segments. You use the @samp{:@var{phdr}} output section
4660attribute to place a section in a particular segment. @xref{Output
4661Section Phdr}.
4662
4663It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment. This
4664merely implies that one segment of memory contains another. You may
4665repeat @samp{:@var{phdr}}, using it once for each segment which should
4666contain the section.
4667
4668If you place a section in one or more segments using @samp{:@var{phdr}},
4669then the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do
4670not specify @samp{:@var{phdr}} in the same segments. This is for
4671convenience, since generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be
4672placed in a single segment. You can use @code{:NONE} to override the
4673default segment and tell the linker to not put the section in any
4674segment at all.
4675
4676@kindex FILEHDR
4677@kindex PHDRS
4678You may use the @code{FILEHDR} and @code{PHDRS} keywords appear after
4679the program header type to further describe the contents of the segment.
4680The @code{FILEHDR} keyword means that the segment should include the ELF
4681file header. The @code{PHDRS} keyword means that the segment should
4682include the ELF program headers themselves.
4683
4684The @var{type} may be one of the following. The numbers indicate the
4685value of the keyword.
4686
4687@table @asis
4688@item @code{PT_NULL} (0)
4689Indicates an unused program header.
4690
4691@item @code{PT_LOAD} (1)
4692Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be loaded from
4693the file.
4694
4695@item @code{PT_DYNAMIC} (2)
4696Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
4697
4698@item @code{PT_INTERP} (3)
4699Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may be
4700found.
4701
4702@item @code{PT_NOTE} (4)
4703Indicates a segment holding note information.
4704
4705@item @code{PT_SHLIB} (5)
4706A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the ELF
4707ABI.
4708
4709@item @code{PT_PHDR} (6)
4710Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
4711
4712@item @var{expression}
4713An expression giving the numeric type of the program header. This may
4714be used for types not defined above.
4715@end table
4716
4717You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular address
4718in memory by using an @code{AT} expression. This is identical to the
4719@code{AT} command used as an output section attribute (@pxref{Output
4720Section LMA}). The @code{AT} command for a program header overrides the
4721output section attribute.
4722
4723The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
4724which comprise the segment. You may use the @code{FLAGS} keyword to
4725explicitly specify the segment flags. The value of @var{flags} must be
4726an integer. It is used to set the @code{p_flags} field of the program
4727header.
4728
4729Here is an example of @code{PHDRS}. This shows a typical set of program
4730headers used on a native ELF system.
4731
4732@example
4733@group
4734PHDRS
4735@{
4736 headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
4737 interp PT_INTERP ;
4738 text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
4739 data PT_LOAD ;
4740 dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
4741@}
4742
4743SECTIONS
4744@{
4745 . = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
4746 .interp : @{ *(.interp) @} :text :interp
4747 .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text
4748 .rodata : @{ *(.rodata) @} /* defaults to :text */
4749 @dots{}
4750 . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
4751 .data : @{ *(.data) @} :data
4752 .dynamic : @{ *(.dynamic) @} :data :dynamic
4753 @dots{}
4754@}
4755@end group
4756@end example
4757
4758@node VERSION
4759@section VERSION Command
4760@kindex VERSION @{script text@}
4761@cindex symbol versions
4762@cindex version script
4763@cindex versions of symbols
4764The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF. Symbol versions are
4765only useful when using shared libraries. The dynamic linker can use
4766symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
4767a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
4768shared library.
4769
4770You can include a version script directly in the main linker script, or
4771you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script. You can
4772also use the @samp{--version-script} linker option.
4773
4774The syntax of the @code{VERSION} command is simply
4775@smallexample
4776VERSION @{ version-script-commands @}
4777@end smallexample
4778
4779The format of the version script commands is identical to that used by
4780Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5. The version script defines a tree of
4781version nodes. You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
4782version script. You can specify which symbols are bound to which
4783version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
4784scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
4785library.
4786
4787The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a few
4788examples.
4789
4790@smallexample
4791VERS_1.1 @{
4792 global:
4793 foo1;
4794 local:
a1ab1d2a
UD
4795 old*;
4796 original*;
4797 new*;
252b5132
RH
4798@};
4799
4800VERS_1.2 @{
4801 foo2;
4802@} VERS_1.1;
4803
4804VERS_2.0 @{
4805 bar1; bar2;
c0065db7 4806 extern "C++" @{
86043bbb
MM
4807 ns::*;
4808 "int f(int, double)";
c0065db7 4809 @}
252b5132
RH
4810@} VERS_1.2;
4811@end smallexample
4812
4813This example version script defines three version nodes. The first
4814version node defined is @samp{VERS_1.1}; it has no other dependencies.
4815The script binds the symbol @samp{foo1} to @samp{VERS_1.1}. It reduces
4816a number of symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside
313e35ee
AM
4817of the shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any
4818symbol whose name begins with @samp{old}, @samp{original}, or @samp{new}
4819is matched. The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used
4820in the shell when matching filenames (also known as ``globbing'').
86043bbb
MM
4821However, if you specify the symbol name inside double quotes, then the
4822name is treated as literal, rather than as a glob pattern.
252b5132
RH
4823
4824Next, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_1.2}. This node
4825depends upon @samp{VERS_1.1}. The script binds the symbol @samp{foo2}
4826to the version node @samp{VERS_1.2}.
4827
4828Finally, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_2.0}. This node
4829depends upon @samp{VERS_1.2}. The scripts binds the symbols @samp{bar1}
4830and @samp{bar2} are bound to the version node @samp{VERS_2.0}.
4831
4832When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
4833specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
4834unspecified base version of the library. You can bind all otherwise
a981ed6f 4835unspecified symbols to a given version node by using @samp{global: *;}
ae5a3597
AM
4836somewhere in the version script. Note that it's slightly crazy to use
4837wildcards in a global spec except on the last version node. Global
4838wildcards elsewhere run the risk of accidentally adding symbols to the
4839set exported for an old version. That's wrong since older versions
4840ought to have a fixed set of symbols.
252b5132
RH
4841
4842The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than what
4843they might suggest to the person reading them. The @samp{2.0} version
4844could just as well have appeared in between @samp{1.1} and @samp{1.2}.
4845However, this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
4846
0f6bf451 4847Node name can be omitted, provided it is the only version node
6b9b879a
JJ
4848in the version script. Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
4849symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and which
4850won't.
4851
4852@smallexample
7c9c73be 4853@{ global: foo; bar; local: *; @};
9d201f2f 4854@end smallexample
6b9b879a 4855
252b5132
RH
4856When you link an application against a shared library that has versioned
4857symbols, the application itself knows which version of each symbol it
4858requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from each
4859shared library it is linked against. Thus at runtime, the dynamic
4860loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
4861linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
4862application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols. In this
4863way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
4864all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
4865search for each symbol reference.
4866
4867The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
4868doing minor version checking that SunOS does. The fundamental problem
4869that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
4870functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
4871the application starts up. If a shared library is out of date, a
4872required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
4873that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail. With symbol
4874versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
4875the libraries being used with the application are too old.
4876
4877There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach. The
4878first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
4879source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
4880script. This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
4881maintainer. You can do this by putting something like:
4882@smallexample
4883__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
4884@end smallexample
4885@noindent
4886in the C source file. This renames the function @samp{original_foo} to
4887be an alias for @samp{foo} bound to the version node @samp{VERS_1.1}.
4888The @samp{local:} directive can be used to prevent the symbol
96a94295
L
4889@samp{original_foo} from being exported. A @samp{.symver} directive
4890takes precedence over a version script.
252b5132
RH
4891
4892The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
4893function to appear in a given shared library. In this way you can make
4894an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
4895version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
4896linked against the old interface to continue to function.
4897
4898To do this, you must use multiple @samp{.symver} directives in the
4899source file. Here is an example:
4900
4901@smallexample
4902__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@");
4903__asm__(".symver old_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
4904__asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo@@VERS_1.2");
4905__asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@@@VERS_2.0");
4906@end smallexample
4907
4908In this example, @samp{foo@@} represents the symbol @samp{foo} bound to the
4909unspecified base version of the symbol. The source file that contains this
4910example would define 4 C functions: @samp{original_foo}, @samp{old_foo},
4911@samp{old_foo1}, and @samp{new_foo}.
4912
4913When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to be
4914some way to specify a default version to which external references to
4915this symbol will be bound. You can do this with the
4916@samp{foo@@@@VERS_2.0} type of @samp{.symver} directive. You can only
4917declare one version of a symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise
4918you would effectively have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
4919
4920If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
4921within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience
36f63dca 4922(i.e., @samp{old_foo}), or you can use the @samp{.symver} directive to
252b5132
RH
4923specifically bind to an external version of the function in question.
4924
cb840a31
L
4925You can also specify the language in the version script:
4926
4927@smallexample
4928VERSION extern "lang" @{ version-script-commands @}
4929@end smallexample
4930
c0065db7 4931The supported @samp{lang}s are @samp{C}, @samp{C++}, and @samp{Java}.
cb840a31
L
4932The linker will iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and
4933demangle them according to @samp{lang} before matching them to the
4934patterns specified in @samp{version-script-commands}.
4935
86043bbb
MM
4936Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters. As
4937described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names,
4938or you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly. In
4939the latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
4940whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
4941cause a mismatch. As the exact string generated by the demangler
4942might change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you
4943should check that all of your version directives are behaving as you
4944expect when you upgrade.
4945
252b5132
RH
4946@node Expressions
4947@section Expressions in Linker Scripts
4948@cindex expressions
4949@cindex arithmetic
4950The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
4951that of C expressions. All expressions are evaluated as integers. All
4952expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
4953host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
4954
4955You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
4956
4957The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use in
4958expressions.
4959
4960@menu
4961* Constants:: Constants
4962* Symbols:: Symbol Names
ecca9871 4963* Orphan Sections:: Orphan Sections
252b5132
RH
4964* Location Counter:: The Location Counter
4965* Operators:: Operators
4966* Evaluation:: Evaluation
4967* Expression Section:: The Section of an Expression
4968* Builtin Functions:: Builtin Functions
4969@end menu
4970
4971@node Constants
4972@subsection Constants
4973@cindex integer notation
4974@cindex constants in linker scripts
4975All constants are integers.
4976
4977As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with @samp{0} to be
4978octal, and an integer beginning with @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} to be
8a308ae8
NC
4979hexadecimal. Alternatively the linker accepts suffixes of @samp{h} or
4980@samp{H} for hexadeciaml, @samp{o} or @samp{O} for octal, @samp{b} or
4981@samp{B} for binary and @samp{d} or @samp{D} for decimal. Any integer
4982value without a prefix or a suffix is considered to be decimal.
252b5132
RH
4983
4984@cindex scaled integers
4985@cindex K and M integer suffixes
4986@cindex M and K integer suffixes
4987@cindex suffixes for integers
4988@cindex integer suffixes
4989In addition, you can use the suffixes @code{K} and @code{M} to scale a
4990constant by
4991@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 4992@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
4993@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
4994@code{1024} or @code{1024*1024}
4995@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 4996@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
4997@tex
4998${\rm 1024}$ or ${\rm 1024}^2$
4999@end tex
5000@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
8a308ae8
NC
5001respectively. For example, the following
5002all refer to the same quantity:
5003
252b5132 5004@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
5005_fourk_1 = 4K;
5006_fourk_2 = 4096;
5007_fourk_3 = 0x1000;
8a308ae8 5008_fourk_4 = 10000o;
252b5132
RH
5009@end smallexample
5010
8a308ae8
NC
5011Note - the @code{K} and @code{M} suffixes cannot be used in
5012conjunction with the base suffixes mentioned above.
5013
252b5132
RH
5014@node Symbols
5015@subsection Symbol Names
5016@cindex symbol names
5017@cindex names
5018@cindex quoted symbol names
5019@kindex "
5020Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
5021and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
5022Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords. You can
5023specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
5024keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
5025@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
5026"SECTION" = 9;
5027"with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
252b5132
RH
5028@end smallexample
5029
5030Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is safest
5031to delimit symbols with spaces. For example, @samp{A-B} is one symbol,
5032whereas @samp{A - B} is an expression involving subtraction.
5033
ecca9871
L
5034@node Orphan Sections
5035@subsection Orphan Sections
5036@cindex orphan
5037Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which
5038are not explicitly placed into the output file by the linker
5039script. The linker will still copy these sections into the
5040output file, but it has to guess as to where they should be
5041placed. The linker uses a simple heuristic to do this. It
5042attempts to place orphan sections after non-orphan sections of the
5043same attribute, such as code vs data, loadable vs non-loadable, etc.
5044If there is not enough room to do this then it places
5045at the end of the file.
5046
5047For ELF targets, the attribute of the section includes section type as
5048well as section flag.
5049
41911f68 5050If an orphaned section's name is representable as a C identifier then
a61ca861 5051the linker will automatically @pxref{PROVIDE} two symbols:
41911f68
NC
5052__start_SECNAME and __end_SECNAME, where SECNAME is the name of the
5053section. These indicate the start address and end address of the
5054orphaned section respectively. Note: most section names are not
5055representable as C identifiers because they contain a @samp{.}
5056character.
5057
252b5132
RH
5058@node Location Counter
5059@subsection The Location Counter
5060@kindex .
5061@cindex dot
5062@cindex location counter
5063@cindex current output location
5064The special linker variable @dfn{dot} @samp{.} always contains the
5065current output location counter. Since the @code{.} always refers to a
5066location in an output section, it may only appear in an expression
5067within a @code{SECTIONS} command. The @code{.} symbol may appear
5068anywhere that an ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression.
5069
5070@cindex holes
5071Assigning a value to @code{.} will cause the location counter to be
5072moved. This may be used to create holes in the output section. The
dc0b6aa0
AM
5073location counter may not be moved backwards inside an output section,
5074and may not be moved backwards outside of an output section if so
5075doing creates areas with overlapping LMAs.
252b5132
RH
5076
5077@smallexample
5078SECTIONS
5079@{
5080 output :
5081 @{
5082 file1(.text)
5083 . = . + 1000;
5084 file2(.text)
5085 . += 1000;
5086 file3(.text)
563e308f 5087 @} = 0x12345678;
252b5132
RH
5088@}
5089@end smallexample
5090@noindent
5091In the previous example, the @samp{.text} section from @file{file1} is
5092located at the beginning of the output section @samp{output}. It is
5093followed by a 1000 byte gap. Then the @samp{.text} section from
5094@file{file2} appears, also with a 1000 byte gap following before the
563e308f 5095@samp{.text} section from @file{file3}. The notation @samp{= 0x12345678}
252b5132
RH
5096specifies what data to write in the gaps (@pxref{Output Section Fill}).
5097
5c6bbab8
NC
5098@cindex dot inside sections
5099Note: @code{.} actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
5100current containing object. Normally this is the @code{SECTIONS}
69da35b5 5101statement, whose start address is 0, hence @code{.} can be used as an
5c6bbab8
NC
5102absolute address. If @code{.} is used inside a section description
5103however, it refers to the byte offset from the start of that section,
5104not an absolute address. Thus in a script like this:
5105
5106@smallexample
5107SECTIONS
5108@{
5109 . = 0x100
5110 .text: @{
5111 *(.text)
5112 . = 0x200
5113 @}
5114 . = 0x500
5115 .data: @{
5116 *(.data)
5117 . += 0x600
5118 @}
5119@}
5120@end smallexample
5121
5122The @samp{.text} section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100
5123and a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in
5124the @samp{.text} input sections to fill this area. (If there is too
5125much data, an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to
5126move @code{.} backwards). The @samp{.data} section will start at 0x500
5127and it will have an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of
5128the values from the @samp{.data} input sections and before the end of
5129the @samp{.data} output section itself.
5130
b5666f2f
AM
5131@cindex dot outside sections
5132Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
5133output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
5134needs to place orphan sections. For example, given the following:
5135
5136@smallexample
5137SECTIONS
5138@{
5139 start_of_text = . ;
5140 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5141 end_of_text = . ;
5142
5143 start_of_data = . ;
5144 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5145 end_of_data = . ;
5146@}
5147@end smallexample
5148
5149If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g. @code{.rodata},
5150not mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section
5151between @code{.text} and @code{.data}. You might think the linker
5152should place @code{.rodata} on the blank line in the above script, but
5153blank lines are of no particular significance to the linker. As well,
5154the linker doesn't associate the above symbol names with their
5155sections. Instead, it assumes that all assignments or other
5156statements belong to the previous output section, except for the
5157special case of an assignment to @code{.}. I.e., the linker will
5158place the orphan @code{.rodata} section as if the script was written
5159as follows:
5160
5161@smallexample
5162SECTIONS
5163@{
5164 start_of_text = . ;
5165 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5166 end_of_text = . ;
5167
5168 start_of_data = . ;
5169 .rodata: @{ *(.rodata) @}
5170 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5171 end_of_data = . ;
5172@}
5173@end smallexample
5174
5175This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of
5176@code{start_of_data}. One way to influence the orphan section
5177placement is to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker
5178assumes that an assignment to @code{.} is setting the start address of
5179a following output section and thus should be grouped with that
5180section. So you could write:
5181
5182@smallexample
5183SECTIONS
5184@{
5185 start_of_text = . ;
5186 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5187 end_of_text = . ;
5188
5189 . = . ;
5190 start_of_data = . ;
5191 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5192 end_of_data = . ;
5193@}
5194@end smallexample
5195
5196Now, the orphan @code{.rodata} section will be placed between
5197@code{end_of_text} and @code{start_of_data}.
5198
252b5132
RH
5199@need 2000
5200@node Operators
5201@subsection Operators
5202@cindex operators for arithmetic
5203@cindex arithmetic operators
5204@cindex precedence in expressions
5205The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
5206the standard bindings and precedence levels:
5207@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5208@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5209@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5210@smallexample
5211precedence associativity Operators Notes
5212(highest)
52131 left ! - ~ (1)
52142 left * / %
52153 left + -
52164 left >> <<
52175 left == != > < <= >=
52186 left &
52197 left |
52208 left &&
52219 left ||
522210 right ? :
522311 right &= += -= *= /= (2)
5224(lowest)
5225@end smallexample
5226Notes:
a1ab1d2a 5227(1) Prefix operators
252b5132
RH
5228(2) @xref{Assignments}.
5229@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5230@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5231@tex
5232\vskip \baselineskip
5233%"lispnarrowing" is the extra indent used generally for smallexample
5234\hskip\lispnarrowing\vbox{\offinterlineskip
5235\hrule
5236\halign
5237{\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ {\tt #}\ \hfil&\vrule#\cr
5238height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5239&Precedence&& Associativity &&{\rm Operators}&\cr
5240height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5241\noalign{\hrule}
5242height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5243&highest&&&&&\cr
5244% '176 is tilde, '~' in tt font
a1ab1d2a 5245&1&&left&&\qquad- \char'176\ !\qquad\dag&\cr
252b5132
RH
5246&2&&left&&* / \%&\cr
5247&3&&left&&+ -&\cr
5248&4&&left&&>> <<&\cr
5249&5&&left&&== != > < <= >=&\cr
5250&6&&left&&\&&\cr
5251&7&&left&&|&\cr
5252&8&&left&&{\&\&}&\cr
5253&9&&left&&||&\cr
5254&10&&right&&? :&\cr
5255&11&&right&&\qquad\&= += -= *= /=\qquad\ddag&\cr
5256&lowest&&&&&\cr
5257height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr}
5258\hrule}
5259@end tex
5260@iftex
5261{
5262@obeylines@parskip=0pt@parindent=0pt
5263@dag@quad Prefix operators.
5264@ddag@quad @xref{Assignments}.
5265}
5266@end iftex
5267@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5268
5269@node Evaluation
5270@subsection Evaluation
5271@cindex lazy evaluation
5272@cindex expression evaluation order
5273The linker evaluates expressions lazily. It only computes the value of
5274an expression when absolutely necessary.
5275
5276The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
5277address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
5278regions, in order to do any linking at all. These values are computed
5279as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
5280
5281However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
5282until after storage allocation. Such values are evaluated later, when
5283other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
5284for use in the symbol assignment expression.
5285
5286The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
5287assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
5288allocation.
5289
5290Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
5291@samp{.}, must be evaluated during section allocation.
5292
5293If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
5294available, then an error results. For example, a script like the
5295following
5296@smallexample
5297@group
5298SECTIONS
5299 @{
a1ab1d2a 5300 .text 9+this_isnt_constant :
252b5132
RH
5301 @{ *(.text) @}
5302 @}
5303@end group
5304@end smallexample
5305@noindent
5306will cause the error message @samp{non constant expression for initial
5307address}.
5308
5309@node Expression Section
5310@subsection The Section of an Expression
5311@cindex expression sections
5312@cindex absolute expressions
5313@cindex relative expressions
5314@cindex absolute and relocatable symbols
5315@cindex relocatable and absolute symbols
5316@cindex symbols, relocatable and absolute
5317When the linker evaluates an expression, the result is either absolute
5318or relative to some section. A relative expression is expressed as a
5319fixed offset from the base of a section.
5320
5321The position of the expression within the linker script determines
5322whether it is absolute or relative. An expression which appears within
5323an output section definition is relative to the base of the output
5324section. An expression which appears elsewhere will be absolute.
5325
5326A symbol set to a relative expression will be relocatable if you request
5327relocatable output using the @samp{-r} option. That means that a
5328further link operation may change the value of the symbol. The symbol's
5329section will be the section of the relative expression.
5330
5331A symbol set to an absolute expression will retain the same value
5332through any further link operation. The symbol will be absolute, and
5333will not have any particular associated section.
5334
5335You can use the builtin function @code{ABSOLUTE} to force an expression
5336to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative. For example, to
5337create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output
5338section @samp{.data}:
5339@smallexample
5340SECTIONS
5341 @{
5342 .data : @{ *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); @}
5343 @}
5344@end smallexample
5345@noindent
5346If @samp{ABSOLUTE} were not used, @samp{_edata} would be relative to the
5347@samp{.data} section.
5348
5349@node Builtin Functions
5350@subsection Builtin Functions
5351@cindex functions in expressions
5352The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
5353use in linker script expressions.
5354
5355@table @code
5356@item ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
5357@kindex ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
5358@cindex expression, absolute
5359Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative) value
5360of the expression @var{exp}. Primarily useful to assign an absolute
5361value to a symbol within a section definition, where symbol values are
5362normally section relative. @xref{Expression Section}.
5363
5364@item ADDR(@var{section})
5365@kindex ADDR(@var{section})
5366@cindex section address in expression
5367Return the absolute address (the VMA) of the named @var{section}. Your
5368script must previously have defined the location of that section. In
5369the following example, @code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned
5370identical values:
5371@smallexample
5372@group
5373SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5374 .output1 :
a1ab1d2a 5375 @{
252b5132
RH
5376 start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
5377 @dots{}
5378 @}
5379 .output :
5380 @{
5381 symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
5382 symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
5383 @}
5384@dots{} @}
5385@end group
5386@end smallexample
5387
876f4090
NS
5388@item ALIGN(@var{align})
5389@itemx ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
5390@kindex ALIGN(@var{align})
5391@kindex ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
252b5132
RH
5392@cindex round up location counter
5393@cindex align location counter
876f4090
NS
5394@cindex round up expression
5395@cindex align expression
5396Return the location counter (@code{.}) or arbitrary expression aligned
5397to the next @var{align} boundary. The single operand @code{ALIGN}
5398doesn't change the value of the location counter---it just does
5399arithmetic on it. The two operand @code{ALIGN} allows an arbitrary
5400expression to be aligned upwards (@code{ALIGN(@var{align})} is
5401equivalent to @code{ALIGN(., @var{align})}).
5402
5403Here is an example which aligns the output @code{.data} section to the
5404next @code{0x2000} byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
5405variable within the section to the next @code{0x8000} boundary after the
5406input sections:
252b5132
RH
5407@smallexample
5408@group
5409SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5410 .data ALIGN(0x2000): @{
5411 *(.data)
5412 variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
5413 @}
5414@dots{} @}
5415@end group
5416@end smallexample
5417@noindent
5418The first use of @code{ALIGN} in this example specifies the location of
5419a section because it is used as the optional @var{address} attribute of
5420a section definition (@pxref{Output Section Address}). The second use
5421of @code{ALIGN} is used to defines the value of a symbol.
5422
5423The builtin function @code{NEXT} is closely related to @code{ALIGN}.
5424
362c1d1a
NS
5425@item ALIGNOF(@var{section})
5426@kindex ALIGNOF(@var{section})
5427@cindex section alignment
5428Return the alignment in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
5429been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
5430evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
5431the alignment of the @code{.output} section is stored as the first
5432value in that section.
5433@smallexample
5434@group
5435SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
5436 .output @{
5437 LONG (ALIGNOF (.output))
5438 @dots{}
5439 @}
5440@dots{} @}
5441@end group
5442@end smallexample
5443
252b5132
RH
5444@item BLOCK(@var{exp})
5445@kindex BLOCK(@var{exp})
5446This is a synonym for @code{ALIGN}, for compatibility with older linker
5447scripts. It is most often seen when setting the address of an output
5448section.
5449
2d20f7bf
JJ
5450@item DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
5451@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
5452This is equivalent to either
5453@smallexample
5454(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - 1)))
5455@end smallexample
5456or
5457@smallexample
5458(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - @var{commonpagesize})))
5459@end smallexample
5460@noindent
5461depending on whether the latter uses fewer @var{commonpagesize} sized pages
5462for the data segment (area between the result of this expression and
5463@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}) than the former or not.
5464If the latter form is used, it means @var{commonpagesize} bytes of runtime
5465memory will be saved at the expense of up to @var{commonpagesize} wasted
5466bytes in the on-disk file.
5467
5468This expression can only be used directly in @code{SECTIONS} commands, not in
5469any output section descriptions and only once in the linker script.
5470@var{commonpagesize} should be less or equal to @var{maxpagesize} and should
5471be the system page size the object wants to be optimized for (while still
5472working on system page sizes up to @var{maxpagesize}).
5473
5474@noindent
5475Example:
5476@smallexample
5477 . = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
5478@end smallexample
5479
5480@item DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
5481@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
5482This defines the end of data segment for @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}
5483evaluation purposes.
5484
5485@smallexample
5486 . = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
5487@end smallexample
5488
a4f5ad88
JJ
5489@item DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
5490@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
5491This defines the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment when
5492@samp{-z relro} option is used. Second argument is returned.
5493When @samp{-z relro} option is not present, @code{DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END}
5494does nothing, otherwise @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} is padded so that
5495@var{exp} + @var{offset} is aligned to the most commonly used page
5496boundary for particular target. If present in the linker script,
5497it must always come in between @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} and
5498@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}.
5499
5500@smallexample
5501 . = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);
5502@end smallexample
5503
252b5132
RH
5504@item DEFINED(@var{symbol})
5505@kindex DEFINED(@var{symbol})
5506@cindex symbol defaults
5507Return 1 if @var{symbol} is in the linker global symbol table and is
420e579c
HPN
5508defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
5509return 0. You can use this function to provide
252b5132
RH
5510default values for symbols. For example, the following script fragment
5511shows how to set a global symbol @samp{begin} to the first location in
5512the @samp{.text} section---but if a symbol called @samp{begin} already
5513existed, its value is preserved:
5514
5515@smallexample
5516@group
5517SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5518 .text : @{
5519 begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
5520 @dots{}
5521 @}
5522 @dots{}
5523@}
5524@end group
5525@end smallexample
5526
3ec57632
NC
5527@item LENGTH(@var{memory})
5528@kindex LENGTH(@var{memory})
5529Return the length of the memory region named @var{memory}.
5530
252b5132
RH
5531@item LOADADDR(@var{section})
5532@kindex LOADADDR(@var{section})
5533@cindex section load address in expression
5534Return the absolute LMA of the named @var{section}. This is normally
5535the same as @code{ADDR}, but it may be different if the @code{AT}
5536attribute is used in the output section definition (@pxref{Output
5537Section LMA}).
5538
5539@kindex MAX
5540@item MAX(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
5541Returns the maximum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
5542
5543@kindex MIN
5544@item MIN(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
5545Returns the minimum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
5546
5547@item NEXT(@var{exp})
5548@kindex NEXT(@var{exp})
5549@cindex unallocated address, next
5550Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of @var{exp}.
5551This function is closely related to @code{ALIGN(@var{exp})}; unless you
5552use the @code{MEMORY} command to define discontinuous memory for the
5553output file, the two functions are equivalent.
5554
3ec57632
NC
5555@item ORIGIN(@var{memory})
5556@kindex ORIGIN(@var{memory})
5557Return the origin of the memory region named @var{memory}.
5558
ba916c8a
MM
5559@item SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
5560@kindex SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
5561Return the base address of the named @var{segment}. If an explicit
5562value has been given for this segment (with a command-line @samp{-T}
5563option) that value will be returned; otherwise the value will be
5564@var{default}. At present, the @samp{-T} command-line option can only
5565be used to set the base address for the ``text'', ``data'', and
5566``bss'' sections, but you use @code{SEGMENT_START} with any segment
5567name.
5568
252b5132
RH
5569@item SIZEOF(@var{section})
5570@kindex SIZEOF(@var{section})
5571@cindex section size
5572Return the size in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
5573been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
5574evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
5575@code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned identical values:
5576@smallexample
5577@group
5578SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
5579 .output @{
5580 .start = . ;
5581 @dots{}
5582 .end = . ;
5583 @}
5584 symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
5585 symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
5586@dots{} @}
5587@end group
5588@end smallexample
5589
5590@item SIZEOF_HEADERS
5591@itemx sizeof_headers
5592@kindex SIZEOF_HEADERS
5593@cindex header size
5594Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers. This is
5595information which appears at the start of the output file. You can use
5596this number when setting the start address of the first section, if you
5597choose, to facilitate paging.
5598
5599@cindex not enough room for program headers
5600@cindex program headers, not enough room
5601When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
5602@code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} builtin function, the linker must compute the
5603number of program headers before it has determined all the section
5604addresses and sizes. If the linker later discovers that it needs
5605additional program headers, it will report an error @samp{not enough
5606room for program headers}. To avoid this error, you must avoid using
5607the @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} function, or you must rework your linker
5608script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program headers, or
5609you must define the program headers yourself using the @code{PHDRS}
5610command (@pxref{PHDRS}).
5611@end table
5612
5613@node Implicit Linker Scripts
5614@section Implicit Linker Scripts
5615@cindex implicit linker scripts
5616If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
5617an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
5618linker script. If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
5619linker will report an error.
5620
5621An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
5622
5623Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
5624assignments, or the @code{INPUT}, @code{GROUP}, or @code{VERSION}
5625commands.
5626
5627Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be read
5628at the position in the command line where the implicit linker script was
5629read. This can affect archive searching.
5630
5631@ifset GENERIC
5632@node Machine Dependent
5633@chapter Machine Dependent Features
5634
5635@cindex machine dependencies
ff5dcc92
SC
5636@command{ld} has additional features on some platforms; the following
5637sections describe them. Machines where @command{ld} has no additional
252b5132
RH
5638functionality are not listed.
5639
5640@menu
36f63dca
NC
5641@ifset H8300
5642* H8/300:: @command{ld} and the H8/300
5643@end ifset
5644@ifset I960
5645* i960:: @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family
5646@end ifset
5647@ifset ARM
5648* ARM:: @command{ld} and the ARM family
5649@end ifset
5650@ifset HPPA
5651* HPPA ELF32:: @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF
5652@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
5653@ifset M68K
5654* M68K:: @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
5655@end ifset
3c3bdf30 5656@ifset MMIX
36f63dca 5657* MMIX:: @command{ld} and MMIX
3c3bdf30 5658@end ifset
2469cfa2 5659@ifset MSP430
36f63dca 5660* MSP430:: @command{ld} and MSP430
2469cfa2 5661@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
5662@ifset M68HC11
5663* M68HC11/68HC12:: @code{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
5664@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
5665@ifset POWERPC
5666* PowerPC ELF32:: @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
5667@end ifset
5668@ifset POWERPC64
5669* PowerPC64 ELF64:: @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
5670@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
5671@ifset SPU
5672* SPU ELF:: @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
5673@end ifset
74459f0e 5674@ifset TICOFF
ff5dcc92 5675* TI COFF:: @command{ld} and TI COFF
74459f0e 5676@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
5677@ifset WIN32
5678* WIN32:: @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
5679@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
5680@ifset XTENSA
5681* Xtensa:: @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors
5682@end ifset
252b5132
RH
5683@end menu
5684@end ifset
5685
252b5132
RH
5686@ifset H8300
5687@ifclear GENERIC
5688@raisesections
5689@end ifclear
5690
5691@node H8/300
ff5dcc92 5692@section @command{ld} and the H8/300
252b5132
RH
5693
5694@cindex H8/300 support
ff5dcc92 5695For the H8/300, @command{ld} can perform these global optimizations when
252b5132
RH
5696you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
5697
5698@table @emph
5699@cindex relaxing on H8/300
5700@item relaxing address modes
ff5dcc92 5701@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
252b5132
RH
5702targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
5703program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
5704respectively.
5705
5706@cindex synthesizing on H8/300
5707@item synthesizing instructions
5708@c FIXME: specifically mov.b, or any mov instructions really?
ff5dcc92 5709@command{ld} finds all @code{mov.b} instructions which use the
252b5132
RH
5710sixteen-bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
5711page of memory, and changes them to use the eight-bit address form.
5712(That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:16} into
5713@samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in the
5714top page of memory).
1502569c
NC
5715
5716@item bit manipulation instructions
c0065db7 5717@command{ld} finds all bit manipulation instructions like @code{band, bclr,
1502569c 5718biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst, bxor}
c0065db7 5719which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
1502569c
NC
5720page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit address form.
5721(That is: the linker turns @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:32} into
c0065db7 5722@samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c
NC
5723the top page of memory).
5724
5725@item system control instructions
c0065db7
RM
5726@command{ld} finds all @code{ldc.w, stc.w} instructions which use the
572732 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
1502569c
NC
5728changes them to use 16 bit address form.
5729(That is: the linker turns @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:32,ccr} into
c0065db7 5730@samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:16,ccr} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c 5731the top page of memory).
252b5132
RH
5732@end table
5733
5734@ifclear GENERIC
5735@lowersections
5736@end ifclear
5737@end ifset
5738
36f63dca 5739@ifclear GENERIC
c2dcd04e 5740@ifset Renesas
36f63dca 5741@c This stuff is pointless to say unless you're especially concerned
c2dcd04e
NC
5742@c with Renesas chips; don't enable it for generic case, please.
5743@node Renesas
5744@chapter @command{ld} and Other Renesas Chips
36f63dca 5745
c2dcd04e
NC
5746@command{ld} also supports the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) H8/300H,
5747H8/500, and SH chips. No special features, commands, or command-line
5748options are required for these chips.
36f63dca
NC
5749@end ifset
5750@end ifclear
5751
5752@ifset I960
5753@ifclear GENERIC
5754@raisesections
5755@end ifclear
5756
5757@node i960
5758@section @command{ld} and the Intel 960 Family
5759
5760@cindex i960 support
5761
5762You can use the @samp{-A@var{architecture}} command line option to
5763specify one of the two-letter names identifying members of the 960
5764family; the option specifies the desired output target, and warns of any
5765incompatible instructions in the input files. It also modifies the
5766linker's search strategy for archive libraries, to support the use of
5767libraries specific to each particular architecture, by including in the
5768search loop names suffixed with the string identifying the architecture.
5769
5770For example, if your @command{ld} command line included @w{@samp{-ACA}} as
5771well as @w{@samp{-ltry}}, the linker would look (in its built-in search
5772paths, and in any paths you specify with @samp{-L}) for a library with
5773the names
5774
5775@smallexample
5776@group
5777try
5778libtry.a
5779tryca
5780libtryca.a
5781@end group
5782@end smallexample
5783
5784@noindent
5785The first two possibilities would be considered in any event; the last
5786two are due to the use of @w{@samp{-ACA}}.
5787
5788You can meaningfully use @samp{-A} more than once on a command line, since
5789the 960 architecture family allows combination of target architectures; each
5790use will add another pair of name variants to search for when @w{@samp{-l}}
5791specifies a library.
5792
5793@cindex @option{--relax} on i960
5794@cindex relaxing on i960
5795@command{ld} supports the @samp{--relax} option for the i960 family. If
5796you specify @samp{--relax}, @command{ld} finds all @code{balx} and
5797@code{calx} instructions whose targets are within 24 bits, and turns
5798them into 24-bit program-counter relative @code{bal} and @code{cal}
5799instructions, respectively. @command{ld} also turns @code{cal}
5800instructions into @code{bal} instructions when it determines that the
5801target subroutine is a leaf routine (that is, the target subroutine does
5802not itself call any subroutines).
5803
5804@ifclear GENERIC
5805@lowersections
5806@end ifclear
5807@end ifset
5808
5809@ifset ARM
5810@ifclear GENERIC
5811@raisesections
5812@end ifclear
5813
93fd0973
SC
5814@ifset M68HC11
5815@ifclear GENERIC
5816@raisesections
5817@end ifclear
5818
5819@node M68HC11/68HC12
5820@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
5821
5822@cindex M68HC11 and 68HC12 support
5823
5824@subsection Linker Relaxation
5825
5826For the Motorola 68HC11, @command{ld} can perform these global
5827optimizations when you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
5828
5829@table @emph
5830@cindex relaxing on M68HC11
5831@item relaxing address modes
5832@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
5833targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
5834program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
5835respectively.
5836
5837@command{ld} also looks at all 16-bit extended addressing modes and
5838transforms them in a direct addressing mode when the address is in
5839page 0 (between 0 and 0x0ff).
5840
5841@item relaxing gcc instruction group
5842When @command{gcc} is called with @option{-mrelax}, it can emit group
5843of instructions that the linker can optimize to use a 68HC11 direct
5844addressing mode. These instructions consists of @code{bclr} or
5845@code{bset} instructions.
5846
5847@end table
5848
5849@subsection Trampoline Generation
5850
5851@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC11
5852@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC12
5853For 68HC11 and 68HC12, @command{ld} can generate trampoline code to
5854call a far function using a normal @code{jsr} instruction. The linker
c0065db7 5855will also change the relocation to some far function to use the
93fd0973
SC
5856trampoline address instead of the function address. This is typically the
5857case when a pointer to a function is taken. The pointer will in fact
5858point to the function trampoline.
5859
5860@ifclear GENERIC
5861@lowersections
5862@end ifclear
5863@end ifset
5864
36f63dca 5865@node ARM
3674e28a 5866@section @command{ld} and the ARM family
36f63dca
NC
5867
5868@cindex ARM interworking support
5869@kindex --support-old-code
5870For the ARM, @command{ld} will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
b45619c0 5871between ARM and Thumb code. These stubs only work with code that has
36f63dca
NC
5872been compiled and assembled with the @samp{-mthumb-interwork} command
5873line option. If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
5874libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
5875option then the @samp{--support-old-code} command line switch should be
5876given to the linker. This will make it generate larger stub functions
5877which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code. Note, however,
5878the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
5879non-interworking aware Thumb code.
5880
5881@cindex thumb entry point
5882@cindex entry point, thumb
5883@kindex --thumb-entry=@var{entry}
5884The @samp{--thumb-entry} switch is a duplicate of the generic
5885@samp{--entry} switch, in that it sets the program's starting address.
5886But it also sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be
5887branched to using a BX instruction, and the program will start
5888executing in Thumb mode straight away.
5889
ce11ba6c
KT
5890@cindex PE import table prefixing
5891@kindex --use-nul-prefixed-import-tables
5892The @samp{--use-nul-prefixed-import-tables} switch is specifying, that
5893the import tables idata4 and idata5 have to be generated with a zero
5894elememt prefix for import libraries. This is the old style to generate
5895import tables. By default this option is turned off.
5896
e489d0ae
PB
5897@cindex BE8
5898@kindex --be8
5899The @samp{--be8} switch instructs @command{ld} to generate BE8 format
5900executables. This option is only valid when linking big-endian objects.
5901The resulting image will contain big-endian data and little-endian code.
5902
3674e28a
PB
5903@cindex TARGET1
5904@kindex --target1-rel
5905@kindex --target1-abs
5906The @samp{R_ARM_TARGET1} relocation is typically used for entries in the
5907@samp{.init_array} section. It is interpreted as either @samp{R_ARM_REL32}
5908or @samp{R_ARM_ABS32}, depending on the target. The @samp{--target1-rel}
5909and @samp{--target1-abs} switches override the default.
5910
5911@cindex TARGET2
5912@kindex --target2=@var{type}
5913The @samp{--target2=type} switch overrides the default definition of the
5914@samp{R_ARM_TARGET2} relocation. Valid values for @samp{type}, their
5915meanings, and target defaults are as follows:
5916@table @samp
5917@item rel
eeac373a
PB
5918@samp{R_ARM_REL32} (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
5919@item abs
5920@samp{R_ARM_ABS32} (arm*-*-symbianelf)
3674e28a
PB
5921@item got-rel
5922@samp{R_ARM_GOT_PREL} (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)
5923@end table
5924
319850b4
JB
5925@cindex FIX_V4BX
5926@kindex --fix-v4bx
5927The @samp{R_ARM_V4BX} relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF
5928specification) enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
5929interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t, but
5930also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4 objects.
5931
5932In the latter case, the switch @option{--fix-v4bx} must be passed to the
5933linker, which causes v4t @code{BX rM} instructions to be rewritten as
5934@code{MOV PC,rM}, since v4 processors do not have a @code{BX} instruction.
5935
5936In the former case, the switch should not be used, and @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
5937relocations are ignored.
5938
845b51d6
PB
5939@cindex FIX_V4BX_INTERWORKING
5940@kindex --fix-v4bx-interworking
5941Replace @code{BX rM} instructions identified by @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
5942relocations with a branch to the following veneer:
5943
5944@smallexample
5945TST rM, #1
5946MOVEQ PC, rM
5947BX Rn
5948@end smallexample
5949
5950This allows generation of libraries/applications that work on ARMv4 cores
5951and are still interworking safe. Note that the above veneer clobbers the
5952condition flags, so may cause incorrect progrm behavior in rare cases.
5953
33bfe774
JB
5954@cindex USE_BLX
5955@kindex --use-blx
5956The @samp{--use-blx} switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb
5957BLX instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various
5958situations. Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb
5959code using BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before
5960each PLT entry. This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.
5961
5962This option is enabled implicitly for SymbianOS, so there is no need to
5963specify it if you are using that target.
5964
c6dd86c6
JB
5965@cindex VFP11_DENORM_FIX
5966@kindex --vfp11-denorm-fix
5967The @samp{--vfp11-denorm-fix} switch enables a link-time workaround for a
5968bug in certain VFP11 coprocessor hardware, which sometimes allows
5969instructions with denorm operands (which must be handled by support code)
5970to have those operands overwritten by subsequent instructions before
5971the support code can read the intended values.
5972
5973The bug may be avoided in scalar mode if you allow at least one
5974intervening instruction between a VFP11 instruction which uses a register
5975and another instruction which writes to the same register, or at least two
5976intervening instructions if vector mode is in use. The bug only affects
5977full-compliance floating-point mode: you do not need this workaround if
5978you are using "runfast" mode. Please contact ARM for further details.
5979
5980If you know you are using buggy VFP11 hardware, you can
5981enable this workaround by specifying the linker option
5982@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=scalar} if you are using the VFP11 scalar
5983mode only, or @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=vector} if you are using
5984vector mode (the latter also works for scalar code). The default is
5985@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=none}.
5986
5987If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
5988potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
5989such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists of the
5990first instruction of the sequence and a branch back to the subsequent
5991instruction. The original instruction is then replaced with a branch to
5992the veneer. The extra cycles required to call and return from the veneer
5993are sufficient to avoid the erratum in both the scalar and vector cases.
5994
bf21ed78
MS
5995@cindex NO_ENUM_SIZE_WARNING
5996@kindex --no-enum-size-warning
726150b7 5997The @option{--no-enum-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
bf21ed78
MS
5998warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
5999enumeration size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6000linking of an object file using 32-bit enumeration values with another
6001using enumeration values fitted into the smallest possible space will
6002not be diagnosed.
a9dc9481
JM
6003
6004@cindex NO_WCHAR_SIZE_WARNING
6005@kindex --no-wchar-size-warning
6006The @option{--no-wchar-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
6007warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6008@code{wchar_t} size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6009linking of an object file using 32-bit @code{wchar_t} values with another
6010using 16-bit @code{wchar_t} values will not be diagnosed.
bf21ed78 6011
726150b7
NC
6012@cindex PIC_VENEER
6013@kindex --pic-veneer
6014The @samp{--pic-veneer} switch makes the linker use PIC sequences for
6015ARM/Thumb interworking veneers, even if the rest of the binary
6016is not PIC. This avoids problems on uClinux targets where
6017@samp{--emit-relocs} is used to generate relocatable binaries.
6018
6019@cindex STUB_GROUP_SIZE
6020@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6021The linker will automatically generate and insert small sequences of
6022code into a linked ARM ELF executable whenever an attempt is made to
6023perform a function call to a symbol that is too far away. The
6024placement of these sequences of instructions - called stubs - is
6025controlled by the command line option @option{--stub-group-size=N}.
6026The placement is important because a poor choice can create a need for
6027duplicate stubs, increasing the code sizw. The linker will try to
6028group stubs together in order to reduce interruptions to the flow of
6029code, but it needs guidance as to how big these groups should be and
6030where they should be placed.
6031
6032The value of @samp{N}, the parameter to the
6033@option{--stub-group-size=} option controls where the stub groups are
07d72278 6034placed. If it is negative then all stubs are placed after the first
726150b7
NC
6035branch that needs them. If it is positive then the stubs can be
6036placed either before or after the branches that need them. If the
6037value of @samp{N} is 1 (either +1 or -1) then the linker will choose
6038exactly where to place groups of stubs, using its built in heuristics.
6039A value of @samp{N} greater than 1 (or smaller than -1) tells the
6040linker that a single group of stubs can service at most @samp{N} bytes
6041from the input sections.
6042
6043The default, if @option{--stub-group-size=} is not specified, is
6044@samp{N = +1}.
6045
1a51c1a4
NC
6046Farcalls stubs insertion is fully supported for the ARM-EABI target
6047only, because it relies on object files properties not present
6048otherwise.
6049
36f63dca
NC
6050@ifclear GENERIC
6051@lowersections
6052@end ifclear
6053@end ifset
6054
6055@ifset HPPA
6056@ifclear GENERIC
6057@raisesections
6058@end ifclear
6059
6060@node HPPA ELF32
6061@section @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
6062@cindex HPPA multiple sub-space stubs
6063@kindex --multi-subspace
6064When generating a shared library, @command{ld} will by default generate
6065import stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application.
6066The @samp{--multi-subspace} switch causes @command{ld} to generate export
6067stubs, and different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with
6068multiple sub-spaces.
6069
6070@cindex HPPA stub grouping
6071@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6072Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by @command{ld} in
6073stub sections located between groups of input sections.
6074@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
6075sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
6076a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
6077the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
6078conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
6079prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
6080A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
6081branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
6082@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
6083@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
6084detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
6085positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
6086
6087Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
6088single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
6089create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
6090large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
6091
6092@ifclear GENERIC
6093@lowersections
6094@end ifclear
6095@end ifset
6096
7fb9f789
NC
6097@ifset M68K
6098@ifclear GENERIC
6099@raisesections
6100@end ifclear
6101
6102@node M68K
6103@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6104
6105@cindex Motorola 68K GOT generation
6106@kindex --got=@var{type}
6107The @samp{--got=@var{type}} option lets you choose the GOT generation scheme.
6108The choices are @samp{single}, @samp{negative}, @samp{multigot} and
6109@samp{target}. When @samp{target} is selected the linker chooses
6110the default GOT generation scheme for the current target.
6111@samp{single} tells the linker to generate a single GOT with
6112entries only at non-negative offsets.
6113@samp{negative} instructs the linker to generate a single GOT with
6114entries at both negative and positive offsets. Not all environments
6115support such GOTs.
6116@samp{multigot} allows the linker to generate several GOTs in the
6117output file. All GOT references from a single input object
6118file access the same GOT, but references from different input object
6119files might access different GOTs. Not all environments support such GOTs.
6120
6121@ifclear GENERIC
6122@lowersections
6123@end ifclear
6124@end ifset
6125
36f63dca
NC
6126@ifset MMIX
6127@ifclear GENERIC
6128@raisesections
6129@end ifclear
6130
6131@node MMIX
6132@section @code{ld} and MMIX
6133For MMIX, there is a choice of generating @code{ELF} object files or
6134@code{mmo} object files when linking. The simulator @code{mmix}
6135understands the @code{mmo} format. The binutils @code{objcopy} utility
6136can translate between the two formats.
6137
6138There is one special section, the @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section.
6139Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
6140registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special symbols,
6141equal to registers. In a final link, the start address of the
6142@samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section corresponds to the first allocated
6143global register multiplied by 8. Register @code{$255} is not included in
6144this section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the
6145symbol @code{Main} for @code{mmo} files.
6146
7a2de473
HPN
6147Global symbols with the prefix @code{__.MMIX.start.}, for example
6148@code{__.MMIX.start..text} and @code{__.MMIX.start..data} are special.
6149The default linker script uses these to set the default start address
6150of a section.
36f63dca
NC
6151
6152Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a section,
6153are left out from an mmo file.
6154
6155@ifclear GENERIC
6156@lowersections
6157@end ifclear
6158@end ifset
6159
6160@ifset MSP430
6161@ifclear GENERIC
6162@raisesections
6163@end ifclear
6164
6165@node MSP430
6166@section @code{ld} and MSP430
6167For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture. The flag @samp{-m [mpu type]}
6168will select an appropriate linker script for selected MPU type. (To get a list of known MPUs
6169just pass @samp{-m help} option to the linker).
6170
6171@cindex MSP430 extra sections
6172The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430 specific:
6173
6174@table @code
6175@item @samp{.vectors}
6176Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
6177
6178@item @samp{.bootloader}
6179Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable). Any code
6180in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
6181
6182@item @samp{.infomem}
6183Defines an information memory section (if applicable). Any code in
6184this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
6185
c0065db7 6186@item @samp{.infomemnobits}
36f63dca
NC
6187This is the same as the @samp{.infomem} section except that any code
6188in this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
6189
6190@item @samp{.noinit}
6191Denotes a portion of RAM located above @samp{.bss} section.
6192
c0065db7 6193The last two sections are used by gcc.
36f63dca
NC
6194@end table
6195
6196@ifclear GENERIC
6197@lowersections
6198@end ifclear
6199@end ifset
6200
2a60a7a8
AM
6201@ifset POWERPC
6202@ifclear GENERIC
6203@raisesections
6204@end ifclear
6205
6206@node PowerPC ELF32
6207@section @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6208@cindex PowerPC long branches
6209@kindex --relax on PowerPC
6210Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
6211displacement, which may result in @command{ld} giving
6212@samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
6213@samp{--relax} enables the generation of trampolines that can access
6214the entire 32-bit address space. These trampolines are inserted at
6215section boundaries, so may not themselves be reachable if an input
6216section exceeds 33M in size.
6217
6218@cindex PowerPC ELF32 options
6219@table @option
6220@cindex PowerPC PLT
6221@kindex --bss-plt
6222@item --bss-plt
6223Current PowerPC GCC accepts a @samp{-msecure-plt} option that
6224generates code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has
6225the security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
6226writable and no writable section ever being executable. PowerPC
6227@command{ld} will generate this layout, including stubs to access the
6228PLT, if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
6229compiled with @samp{-msecure-plt}. @samp{--bss-plt} forces the old
6230BSS PLT (and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.
6231
016687f8
AM
6232@kindex --secure-plt
6233@item --secure-plt
6234@command{ld} will use the new PLT and GOT layout if it is linking new
6235@samp{-fpic} or @samp{-fPIC} code, but does not do so automatically
6236when linking non-PIC code. This option requests the new PLT and GOT
6237layout. A warning will be given if some object file requires the old
6238style BSS PLT.
6239
2a60a7a8
AM
6240@cindex PowerPC GOT
6241@kindex --sdata-got
6242@item --sdata-got
6243The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
6244sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement. The location of
6245@code{.plt} must change because the new secure PLT is an initialized
6246section while the old PLT is uninitialized. The reason for the
6247@code{.got} change is more subtle: The new placement allows
6248@code{.got} to be read-only in applications linked with
6249@samp{-z relro -z now}. However, this placement means that
6250@code{.sdata} cannot always be used in shared libraries, because the
6251PowerPC ABI accesses @code{.sdata} in shared libraries from the GOT
6252pointer. @samp{--sdata-got} forces the old GOT placement. PowerPC
6253GCC doesn't use @code{.sdata} in shared libraries, so this option is
6254really only useful for other compilers that may do so.
6255
6256@cindex PowerPC stub symbols
6257@kindex --emit-stub-syms
6258@item --emit-stub-syms
6259This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
6260symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6261
6262@cindex PowerPC TLS optimization
6263@kindex --no-tls-optimize
6264@item --no-tls-optimize
6265PowerPC @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
6266sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
6267disable the optimization.
6268@end table
6269
6270@ifclear GENERIC
6271@lowersections
6272@end ifclear
6273@end ifset
6274
6275@ifset POWERPC64
6276@ifclear GENERIC
6277@raisesections
6278@end ifclear
6279
6280@node PowerPC64 ELF64
6281@section @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6282
6283@cindex PowerPC64 ELF64 options
6284@table @option
6285@cindex PowerPC64 stub grouping
6286@kindex --stub-group-size
6287@item --stub-group-size
6288Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs and TOC adjusting stubs are placed
6289by @command{ld} in stub sections located between groups of input sections.
6290@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
6291sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
6292a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
6293the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
6294conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
6295prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
6296A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
6297branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
6298@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
6299@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
6300detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
6301positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
6302
6303Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
6304single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
6305create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
6306large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
6307
6308@cindex PowerPC64 stub symbols
6309@kindex --emit-stub-syms
6310@item --emit-stub-syms
6311This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
6312symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6313
6314@cindex PowerPC64 dot symbols
6315@kindex --dotsyms
6316@kindex --no-dotsyms
6317@item --dotsyms, --no-dotsyms
6318These two options control how @command{ld} interprets version patterns
6319in a version script. Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a
6320function descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and a
6321code entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot (@samp{.}). To
6322properly version a function @samp{foo}, the version script thus needs
6323to control both @samp{foo} and @samp{.foo}. The option
6324@samp{--dotsyms}, on by default, automatically adds the required
6325dot-prefixed patterns. Use @samp{--no-dotsyms} to disable this
6326feature.
6327
6328@cindex PowerPC64 TLS optimization
6329@kindex --no-tls-optimize
6330@item --no-tls-optimize
6331PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
6332sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
6333disable the optimization.
6334
6335@cindex PowerPC64 OPD optimization
6336@kindex --no-opd-optimize
6337@item --no-opd-optimize
6338PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes @code{.opd} section entries
6339corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed by
e7fc76dd 6340the action of @samp{--gc-sections} or linker script @code{/DISCARD/}.
2a60a7a8
AM
6341Use this option to disable @code{.opd} optimization.
6342
6343@cindex PowerPC64 OPD spacing
6344@kindex --non-overlapping-opd
6345@item --non-overlapping-opd
6346Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
6347@code{.opd} entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
6348the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the next
6349entry. This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.
6350
6351@cindex PowerPC64 TOC optimization
6352@kindex --no-toc-optimize
6353@item --no-toc-optimize
6354PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes unused @code{.toc} section
6355entries. Such entries are detected by examining relocations that
6356reference the TOC in code sections. A reloc in a deleted code section
6357marks a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section
6358marks a TOC word as needed. Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
6359relocs are also examined. TOC words marked as both needed and
6360unneeded will of course be kept. TOC words without any referencing
6361reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
6362discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word. This works
6363reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if assembly
6364code is used to insert TOC entries. Use this option to disable the
6365optimization.
6366
6367@cindex PowerPC64 multi-TOC
6368@kindex --no-multi-toc
6369@item --no-multi-toc
6370By default, PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model where TOC
6371entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2. This limits the
6372total TOC size to 64K. PowerPC64 @command{ld} extends this limit by
6373grouping code sections such that each group uses less than 64K for its
6374TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs between inter-group
6375calls. @command{ld} does not split apart input sections, so cannot
6376help if a single input file has a @code{.toc} section that exceeds
637764K, most likely from linking multiple files with @command{ld -r}.
6378Use this option to turn off this feature.
6379@end table
6380
6381@ifclear GENERIC
6382@lowersections
6383@end ifclear
6384@end ifset
6385
49fa1e15
AM
6386@ifset SPU
6387@ifclear GENERIC
6388@raisesections
6389@end ifclear
6390
6391@node SPU ELF
6392@section @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
6393
6394@cindex SPU ELF options
6395@table @option
6396
6397@cindex SPU plugins
6398@kindex --plugin
6399@item --plugin
6400This option marks an executable as a PIC plugin module.
6401
6402@cindex SPU overlays
6403@kindex --no-overlays
6404@item --no-overlays
6405Normally, @command{ld} recognizes calls to functions within overlay
6406regions, and redirects such calls to an overlay manager via a stub.
6407@command{ld} also provides a built-in overlay manager. This option
6408turns off all this special overlay handling.
6409
6410@cindex SPU overlay stub symbols
6411@kindex --emit-stub-syms
6412@item --emit-stub-syms
6413This option causes @command{ld} to label overlay stubs with a local
6414symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6415
6416@cindex SPU extra overlay stubs
6417@kindex --extra-overlay-stubs
6418@item --extra-overlay-stubs
6419This option causes @command{ld} to add overlay call stubs on all
6420function calls out of overlay regions. Normally stubs are not added
6421on calls to non-overlay regions.
6422
6423@cindex SPU local store size
6424@kindex --local-store=lo:hi
6425@item --local-store=lo:hi
6426@command{ld} usually checks that a final executable for SPU fits in
6427the address range 0 to 256k. This option may be used to change the
6428range. Disable the check entirely with @option{--local-store=0:0}.
6429
c0065db7 6430@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
6431@kindex --stack-analysis
6432@item --stack-analysis
6433SPU local store space is limited. Over-allocation of stack space
6434unnecessarily limits space available for code and data, while
6435under-allocation results in runtime failures. If given this option,
6436@command{ld} will provide an estimate of maximum stack usage.
6437@command{ld} does this by examining symbols in code sections to
6438determine the extents of functions, and looking at function prologues
6439for stack adjusting instructions. A call-graph is created by looking
6440for relocations on branch instructions. The graph is then searched
6441for the maximum stack usage path. Note that this analysis does not
6442find calls made via function pointers, and does not handle recursion
6443and other cycles in the call graph. Stack usage may be
6444under-estimated if your code makes such calls. Also, stack usage for
6445dynamic allocation, e.g. alloca, will not be detected. If a link map
6446is requested, detailed information about each function's stack usage
6447and calls will be given.
6448
c0065db7 6449@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
6450@kindex --emit-stack-syms
6451@item --emit-stack-syms
6452This option, if given along with @option{--stack-analysis} will result
6453in @command{ld} emitting stack sizing symbols for each function.
6454These take the form @code{__stack_<function_name>} for global
6455functions, and @code{__stack_<number>_<function_name>} for static
6456functions. @code{<number>} is the section id in hex. The value of
6457such symbols is the stack requirement for the corresponding function.
6458The symbol size will be zero, type @code{STT_NOTYPE}, binding
c0065db7 6459@code{STB_LOCAL}, and section @code{SHN_ABS}.
49fa1e15
AM
6460@end table
6461
6462@ifclear GENERIC
6463@lowersections
6464@end ifclear
6465@end ifset
6466
36f63dca
NC
6467@ifset TICOFF
6468@ifclear GENERIC
6469@raisesections
6470@end ifclear
6471
6472@node TI COFF
6473@section @command{ld}'s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
6474@cindex TI COFF versions
6475@kindex --format=@var{version}
6476The @samp{--format} switch allows selection of one of the various
6477TI COFF versions. The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are
6478also supported. The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order
6479format; @command{ld} will read any version or byte order, but the output
6480header format depends on the default specified by the specific target.
6481
6482@ifclear GENERIC
6483@lowersections
6484@end ifclear
6485@end ifset
6486
2ca22b03
NC
6487@ifset WIN32
6488@ifclear GENERIC
6489@raisesections
6490@end ifclear
6491
6492@node WIN32
6493@section @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
6494
c0065db7 6495This section describes some of the win32 specific @command{ld} issues.
b45619c0 6496See @ref{Options,,Command Line Options} for detailed description of the
dc8465bf 6497command line options mentioned here.
2ca22b03
NC
6498
6499@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
6500@cindex import libraries
6501@item import libraries
69da35b5 6502The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
2ca22b03 6503libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's. They are
69da35b5
NC
6504regular static archives and are handled as any other static
6505archive. The cygwin and mingw ports of @command{ld} have specific
2ca22b03
NC
6506support for creating such libraries provided with the
6507@samp{--out-implib} command line option.
6508
c0065db7
RM
6509@item exporting DLL symbols
6510@cindex exporting DLL symbols
dc8465bf
NC
6511The cygwin/mingw @command{ld} has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
6512
6513@table @emph
6514@item using auto-export functionality
6515@cindex using auto-export functionality
6516By default @command{ld} exports symbols with the auto-export functionality,
6517which is controlled by the following command line options:
6518
0a5d968e
NC
6519@itemize
6520@item --export-all-symbols [This is the default]
6521@item --exclude-symbols
6522@item --exclude-libs
e1c37eb5 6523@item --exclude-modules-for-implib
0a5d968e
NC
6524@end itemize
6525
c0065db7 6526If, however, @samp{--export-all-symbols} is not given explicitly on the
0a5d968e
NC
6527command line, then the default auto-export behavior will be @emph{disabled}
6528if either of the following are true:
6529
6530@itemize
6531@item A DEF file is used.
6532@item Any symbol in any object file was marked with the __declspec(dllexport) attribute.
6533@end itemize
dc8465bf 6534
c0065db7
RM
6535@item using a DEF file
6536@cindex using a DEF file
dc8465bf
NC
6537Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file. A DEF file is
6538an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which should be
6539exported when a dll is created. Usually it is named @samp{<dll
6540name>.def} and is added as any other object file to the linker's
0a5d968e 6541command line. The file's name must end in @samp{.def} or @samp{.DEF}.
dc8465bf
NC
6542
6543@example
6544gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def
6545@end example
6546
0a5d968e
NC
6547Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior, unless the
6548@samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
6549
dc8465bf
NC
6550Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called @samp{xyz.dll}:
6551
6552@example
4b5bd4e7 6553LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000
dc8465bf
NC
6554
6555EXPORTS
6556foo
6557bar
6558_bar = bar
4b5bd4e7
DS
6559another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
6560var1 DATA
c0065db7 6561@end example
dc8465bf 6562
4b5bd4e7
DS
6563This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address and five
6564symbols in the export table. The third exported symbol @code{_bar} is an
6565alias for the second. The fourth symbol, @code{another_foo} is resolved
6566by "forwarding" to another module and treating it as an alias for
6567@code{afoo} exported from the DLL @samp{abc.dll}. The final symbol
6568@code{var1} is declared to be a data object.
6569
6b31ad16
DS
6570The optional @code{LIBRARY <name>} command indicates the @emph{internal}
6571name of the output DLL. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix,
6572the default library suffix, @samp{.DLL} is appended.
6573
b45619c0
NC
6574When the .DEF file is used to build an application, rather than a
6575library, the @code{NAME <name>} command should be used instead of
6b31ad16 6576@code{LIBRARY}. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix, the default
c0065db7 6577executable suffix, @samp{.EXE} is appended.
6b31ad16
DS
6578
6579With either @code{LIBRARY <name>} or @code{NAME <name>} the optional
6580specification @code{BASE = <number>} may be used to specify a
c0065db7 6581non-default base address for the image.
6b31ad16
DS
6582
6583If neither @code{LIBRARY <name>} nor @code{NAME <name>} is specified,
a2877985
DS
6584or they specify an empty string, the internal name is the same as the
6585filename specified on the command line.
6b31ad16 6586
4b5bd4e7
DS
6587The complete specification of an export symbol is:
6588
6589@example
6590EXPORTS
6591 ( ( ( <name1> [ = <name2> ] )
6592 | ( <name1> = <module-name> . <external-name>))
6593 [ @@ <integer> ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] ) *
c0065db7 6594@end example
4b5bd4e7
DS
6595
6596Declares @samp{<name1>} as an exported symbol from the DLL, or declares
6597@samp{<name1>} as an exported alias for @samp{<name2>}; or declares
6598@samp{<name1>} as a "forward" alias for the symbol
6599@samp{<external-name>} in the DLL @samp{<module-name>}.
6600Optionally, the symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal
6601@samp{<integer>} alias.
6602
6603The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:
6604
6605@code{NONAME}: Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export table. It
6606will still be exported by its ordinal alias (either the value specified
6607by the .def specification or, otherwise, the value assigned by the
6608linker). The symbol name, however, does remain visible in the import
6609library (if any), unless @code{PRIVATE} is also specified.
6610
6611@code{DATA}: The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a function.
6612The import lib will export only an indirect reference to @code{foo} as
6613the symbol @code{_imp__foo} (ie, @code{foo} must be resolved as
6614@code{*_imp__foo}).
6615
6616@code{CONSTANT}: Like @code{DATA}, but put the undecorated @code{foo} as
6617well as @code{_imp__foo} into the import library. Both refer to the
6618read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not to the
6619variable itself. This can be dangerous. If the user code fails to add
6620the @code{dllimport} attribute and also fails to explicitly add the
6621extra indirection that the use of the attribute enforces, the
6622application will behave unexpectedly.
6623
6624@code{PRIVATE}: Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do not put
6625it into the static import library used to resolve imports at link time. The
6626symbol can still be imported using the @code{LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress}
6627API at runtime or by by using the GNU ld extension of linking directly to
6628the DLL without an import library.
c0065db7 6629
4b5bd4e7
DS
6630See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full specification of
6631other DEF file statements
dc8465bf
NC
6632
6633@cindex creating a DEF file
6634While linking a shared dll, @command{ld} is able to create a DEF file
6635with the @samp{--output-def <file>} command line option.
0a5d968e
NC
6636
6637@item Using decorations
6638@cindex Using decorations
6639Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the source code
6640itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol to be exported is
6641declared as:
6642
6643@example
6644__declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
6645__declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
6646@end example
6647
6648All such symbols will be exported from the DLL. If, however,
6649any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated in
6650this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is disabled, unless
6651the @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
6652
6653Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must @emph{not}
c0065db7 6654decorate them with dllexport. Instead, they should use dllimport,
0a5d968e
NC
6655instead:
6656
6657@example
6658__declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
6659__declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
6660@end example
6661
c0065db7
RM
6662This complicates the structure of library header files, because
6663when included by the library itself the header must declare the
0a5d968e
NC
6664variables and functions as dllexport, but when included by client
6665code the header must declare them as dllimport. There are a number
c0065db7 6666of idioms that are typically used to do this; often client code can
0a5d968e
NC
6667omit the __declspec() declaration completely. See
6668@samp{--enable-auto-import} and @samp{automatic data imports} for more
b45619c0 6669information.
c0065db7 6670@end table
dc8465bf 6671
2ca22b03
NC
6672@cindex automatic data imports
6673@item automatic data imports
6674The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls only
69da35b5 6675by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which let the
2ca22b03 6676compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal with this
c0065db7 6677issue. This increases the effort necessary to port existing Un*x
69da35b5 6678code to these platforms, especially for large
2ca22b03 6679c++ libraries and applications. The auto-import feature, which was
c0065db7 6680initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the
b45619c0 6681decorations to achieve a behavior that conforms to that on POSIX/Un*x
c0065db7 6682platforms. This feature is enabled with the @samp{--enable-auto-import}
69da35b5
NC
6683command-line option, although it is enabled by default on cygwin/mingw.
6684The @samp{--enable-auto-import} option itself now serves mainly to
6685suppress any warnings that are ordinarily emitted when linked objects
6686trigger the feature's use.
6687
c0065db7 6688auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
69da35b5
NC
6689additional assistance. Sometimes, you will see this message
6690
c0065db7 6691"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
69da35b5
NC
6692documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
6693
c0065db7
RM
6694The @samp{--enable-auto-import} documentation explains why this error
6695occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this difficulty.
6696One of these methods is the @emph{runtime pseudo-relocs} feature, described
69da35b5
NC
6697below.
6698
6699@cindex runtime pseudo-relocation
c0065db7
RM
6700For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or classes),
6701object files typically contain a base address for the variable and an
6702offset (@emph{addend}) within the variable--to specify a particular
6703field or public member, for instance. Unfortunately, the runtime loader used
6704in win32 environments is incapable of fixing these references at runtime
69da35b5 6705without the additional information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations.
c0065db7 6706The standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve these
69da35b5
NC
6707references.
6708
c0065db7
RM
6709The @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} switch allows these references to
6710be resolved without error, while leaving the task of adjusting the references
6711themselves (with their non-zero addends) to specialized code provided by the
6712runtime environment. Recent versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and
6713compilers provide this runtime support; older versions do not. However, the
6714support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the compiled result will
69da35b5
NC
6715run without error on an older system.
6716
c0065db7
RM
6717@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is not the default; it must be explicitly
6718enabled as needed.
2ca22b03
NC
6719
6720@cindex direct linking to a dll
6721@item direct linking to a dll
6722The cygwin/mingw ports of @command{ld} support the direct linking,
6723including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
69da35b5 6724libraries. This is much faster and uses much less memory than does the
b45619c0 6725traditional import library method, especially when linking large
c0065db7
RM
6726libraries or applications. When @command{ld} creates an import lib, each
6727function or variable exported from the dll is stored in its own bfd, even
6728though a single bfd could contain many exports. The overhead involved in
69da35b5 6729storing, loading, and processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the
c0065db7 6730tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against particularly
69da35b5
NC
6731large or complex libraries when using import libs.
6732
c0065db7 6733Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches other than
69da35b5 6734@samp{-L} and @samp{-l}, because @command{ld} already searches for a number
c0065db7 6735of names to match each library. All that is needed from the developer's
69da35b5
NC
6736perspective is an understanding of this search, in order to force ld to
6737select the dll instead of an import library.
6738
2ca22b03 6739
69da35b5
NC
6740For instance, when ld is called with the argument @samp{-lxxx} it will attempt
6741to find, in the first directory of its search path,
2ca22b03
NC
6742
6743@example
45e948fe
NC
6744libxxx.dll.a
6745xxx.dll.a
6746libxxx.a
6747xxx.lib
69da35b5 6748cygxxx.dll (*)
45e948fe
NC
6749libxxx.dll
6750xxx.dll
2ca22b03
NC
6751@end example
6752
69da35b5
NC
6753before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
6754
c0065db7
RM
6755(*) Actually, this is not @samp{cygxxx.dll} but in fact is @samp{<prefix>xxx.dll},
6756where @samp{<prefix>} is set by the @command{ld} option
6757@samp{--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>}. In the case of cygwin, the standard gcc spec
6758file includes @samp{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}, so in effect we actually search for
69da35b5
NC
6759@samp{cygxxx.dll}.
6760
c0065db7
RM
6761Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may use other
6762@samp{<prefix>}es, although at present only cygwin makes use of this feature. It
69da35b5
NC
6763was originally intended to help avoid name conflicts among dll's built for the
6764various win32/un*x environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
6765could coexist on the same machine.
6766
2ca22b03
NC
6767The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a @samp{bin} directory for
6768applications and dll's and a @samp{lib} directory for the import
69da35b5 6769libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
2ca22b03
NC
6770
6771@example
6772bin/
6773 cygxxx.dll
6774lib/
6775 libxxx.dll.a (in case of dll's)
c0065db7 6776 libxxx.a (in case of static archive)
2ca22b03
NC
6777@end example
6778
c0065db7
RM
6779Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
6780done two ways:
2ca22b03
NC
6781
67821. Use the dll directly by adding the @samp{bin} path to the link line
6783@example
6784gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
c0065db7 6785@end example
2ca22b03 6786
69da35b5
NC
6787However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their names
6788(@samp{cygncurses-5.dll}) this will often fail, unless one specifies
6789@samp{-L../bin -lncurses-5} to include the version. Import libs are generally
6790not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
6791
2ca22b03
NC
67922. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the @samp{lib}
6793directory according to the above mentioned search pattern. This
6794should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
6795making the app/dll.
6796
6797@example
6798ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
c0065db7 6799@end example
2ca22b03
NC
6800
6801Then you can link without any make environment changes.
6802
6803@example
6804gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
c0065db7 6805@end example
69da35b5
NC
6806
6807This technique also avoids the version number problems, because the following is
6808perfectly legal
6809
6810@example
6811bin/
6812 cygxxx-5.dll
6813lib/
c0065db7 6814 libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
69da35b5
NC
6815@end example
6816
dc8465bf 6817Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
69da35b5
NC
6818even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
6819@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is used.
6820
6821Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might justifiably
45e948fe 6822wonder why import libraries are used at all. There are three reasons:
69da35b5
NC
6823
68241. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did @emph{not}
6825work with auto-imported data.
6826
dc8465bf
NC
68272. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within the
6828import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for indirection
6829symbols that point to the exports of a dll). Again, the import lib
6830for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability, and it is not
6831possible to do this without an import lib.
69da35b5 6832
45e948fe
NC
68333. Symbol aliases can only be resolved using an import lib. This is
6834critical when linking against OS-supplied dll's (eg, the win32 API)
6835in which symbols are usually exported as undecorated aliases of their
6836stdcall-decorated assembly names.
6837
69da35b5 6838So, import libs are not going away. But the ability to replace
c0065db7
RM
6839true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of)
6840a dll, in many cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
6841binutils makes available to the win32 developer. Given the
69da35b5
NC
6842massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
6843requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
6844will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
dc8465bf 6845
c0065db7 6846@item symbol aliasing
dc8465bf 6847@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
6848@item adding additional names
6849Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional names.
dc8465bf
NC
6850A symbol @samp{foo} will be exported as @samp{foo}, but it can also be
6851exported as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the DEF file
6852when creating the dll. This will affect also the optional created
c0065db7 6853import library. Consider the following DEF file:
dc8465bf 6854
c0065db7 6855@example
dc8465bf
NC
6856LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
6857
6858EXPORTS
c0065db7 6859foo
dc8465bf 6860_foo = foo
c0065db7 6861@end example
dc8465bf
NC
6862
6863The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the symbol @samp{foo} to @samp{_foo}.
6864
6865Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in the
6866source code using the "weak" attribute:
6867
c0065db7
RM
6868@example
6869void foo () @{ /* Do something. */; @}
dc8465bf 6870void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
c0065db7 6871@end example
dc8465bf
NC
6872
6873See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and weak
6874symbols.
6875
6876@item renaming symbols
6877Sometimes it is useful to rename exports. For instance, the cygwin
c0065db7 6878kernel does this regularly. A symbol @samp{_foo} can be exported as
dc8465bf
NC
6879@samp{foo} but not as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the
6880DEF file. (This will also affect the import library, if it is
c0065db7 6881created). In the following example:
dc8465bf 6882
c0065db7 6883@example
dc8465bf
NC
6884LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
6885
6886EXPORTS
6887_foo = foo
c0065db7 6888@end example
dc8465bf
NC
6889
6890The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the exported symbol @samp{foo} to
6891@samp{_foo}.
c0065db7 6892@end table
dc8465bf 6893
0a5d968e 6894Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
c0065db7 6895unless the @samp{--export-all-symbols} command line option is used.
0a5d968e 6896If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
c0065db7
RM
6897@emph{all} desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols
6898that are not being renamed, and do @emph{not} use the
6899@samp{--export-all-symbols} option. If you list only the
6900renamed symbols in the DEF file, and use @samp{--export-all-symbols}
6901to handle the other symbols, then the both the new names @emph{and}
6902the original names for the renamed symbols will be exported.
6903In effect, you'd be aliasing those symbols, not renaming them,
0a5d968e 6904which is probably not what you wanted.
c87db184
CF
6905
6906@cindex weak externals
6907@item weak externals
6908The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols called
6909weak externals. When a weak symbol is linked and the symbol is not
6910defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some other symbol. There
6911are three variants of weak externals:
6912@itemize
6913@item Definition is searched for in objects and libraries, historically
6914called lazy externals.
6915@item Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in libraries.
6916This form is not presently implemented.
6917@item No search; the symbol is an alias. This form is not presently
6918implemented.
6919@end itemize
6920As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate symbol
6921are supported. If the symbol is undefined when linking, the symbol
6922uses a default value.
2ca22b03
NC
6923@end table
6924
6925@ifclear GENERIC
6926@lowersections
6927@end ifclear
6928@end ifset
6929
e0001a05
NC
6930@ifset XTENSA
6931@ifclear GENERIC
6932@raisesections
6933@end ifclear
6934
6935@node Xtensa
6936@section @code{ld} and Xtensa Processors
6937
6938@cindex Xtensa processors
6939The default @command{ld} behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
6940@code{SECTIONS} commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
6941specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
6942keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets. For
6943example, with the command:
6944
6945@smallexample
6946SECTIONS
6947@{
6948 .text : @{
6949 *(.literal .text)
6950 @}
6951@}
6952@end smallexample
6953
6954@noindent
6955@command{ld} may interleave some of the @code{.literal}
6956and @code{.text} sections from different object files to ensure that the
6957literal pools are within the range of PC-relative load offsets. A valid
6958interleaving might place the @code{.literal} sections from an initial
6959group of files followed by the @code{.text} sections of that group of
6960files. Then, the @code{.literal} sections from the rest of the files
6961and the @code{.text} sections from the rest of the files would follow.
e0001a05 6962
43cd72b9 6963@cindex @option{--relax} on Xtensa
e0001a05 6964@cindex relaxing on Xtensa
43cd72b9
BW
6965Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of @command{ld} and
6966provides two important link-time optimizations. The first optimization
6967is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size. A redundant
6968literal will be removed and all the @code{L32R} instructions that use it
6969will be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the
6970location of the replacement literal is within the offset range of all
6971the @code{L32R} instructions. The second optimization is to remove
6972unnecessary overhead from assembler-generated ``longcall'' sequences of
6973@code{L32R}/@code{CALLX@var{n}} when the target functions are within
6974range of direct @code{CALL@var{n}} instructions.
6975
6976For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be optimized
6977to a direct call, the linker will change the @code{CALLX@var{n}}
6978instruction to a @code{CALL@var{n}} instruction, remove the @code{L32R}
6979instruction, and remove the literal referenced by the @code{L32R}
6980instruction if it is not used for anything else. Removing the
6981@code{L32R} instruction always reduces code size but can potentially
6982hurt performance by changing the alignment of subsequent branch targets.
6983By default, the linker will always preserve alignments, either by
6984switching some instructions between 24-bit encodings and the equivalent
6985density instructions or by inserting a no-op in place of the @code{L32R}
6986instruction that was removed. If code size is more important than
6987performance, the @option{--size-opt} option can be used to prevent the
6988linker from widening density instructions or inserting no-ops, except in
6989a few cases where no-ops are required for correctness.
6990
6991The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
6992control the linker:
6993
6994@cindex Xtensa options
6995@table @option
e0001a05 6996@kindex --no-relax
43cd72b9
BW
6997@item --no-relax
6998Since the Xtensa version of @code{ld} enables the @option{--relax} option
6999by default, the @option{--no-relax} option is provided to disable
7000relaxation.
7001
7002@item --size-opt
7003When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code size
7004more than performance. With this option, the linker will not insert
7005no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch target
7006alignment. There may still be some cases where no-ops are required to
7007preserve the correctness of the code.
7008@end table
e0001a05
NC
7009
7010@ifclear GENERIC
7011@lowersections
7012@end ifclear
7013@end ifset
7014
252b5132
RH
7015@ifclear SingleFormat
7016@node BFD
7017@chapter BFD
7018
7019@cindex back end
7020@cindex object file management
7021@cindex object formats available
7022@kindex objdump -i
7023The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
7024These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
7025object files whatever the object file format. A different object file
7026format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
7027it to the library. To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
7028associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
7029object file formats available. You can use @code{objdump -i}
7030(@pxref{objdump,,objdump,binutils.info,The GNU Binary Utilities}) to
7031list all the formats available for your configuration.
7032
7033@cindex BFD requirements
7034@cindex requirements for BFD
7035As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between
7036several conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing
7037BFD design was efficiency: any time used converting between
7038formats is time which would not have been spent had BFD not
7039been involved. This is partly offset by abstraction payback; since
7040BFD simplifies applications and back ends, more time and care
7041may be spent optimizing algorithms for a greater speed.
7042
7043One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in
7044mind is the potential for information loss. There are two places where
7045useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
7046conversion and during output. @xref{BFD information loss}.
7047
7048@menu
7049* BFD outline:: How it works: an outline of BFD
7050@end menu
7051
7052@node BFD outline
36f63dca 7053@section How It Works: An Outline of BFD
252b5132
RH
7054@cindex opening object files
7055@include bfdsumm.texi
7056@end ifclear
7057
7058@node Reporting Bugs
7059@chapter Reporting Bugs
ff5dcc92
SC
7060@cindex bugs in @command{ld}
7061@cindex reporting bugs in @command{ld}
252b5132 7062
ff5dcc92 7063Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{ld} reliable.
252b5132
RH
7064
7065Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or
7066it may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is
ff5dcc92 7067to help the entire community by making the next version of @command{ld}
252b5132 7068work better. Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of
ff5dcc92 7069@command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
7070
7071In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
7072information that enables us to fix the bug.
7073
7074@menu
7075* Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
7076* Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
7077@end menu
7078
7079@node Bug Criteria
36f63dca 7080@section Have You Found a Bug?
252b5132
RH
7081@cindex bug criteria
7082
7083If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
7084
7085@itemize @bullet
7086@cindex fatal signal
7087@cindex linker crash
7088@cindex crash of linker
7089@item
7090If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
ff5dcc92 7091@command{ld} bug. Reliable linkers never crash.
252b5132
RH
7092
7093@cindex error on valid input
7094@item
ff5dcc92 7095If @command{ld} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
252b5132
RH
7096
7097@cindex invalid input
7098@item
ff5dcc92 7099If @command{ld} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
252b5132
RH
7100may be a bug. In the general case, the linker can not verify that
7101object files are correct.
7102
7103@item
7104If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
ff5dcc92 7105improvement of @command{ld} are welcome in any case.
252b5132
RH
7106@end itemize
7107
7108@node Bug Reporting
36f63dca 7109@section How to Report Bugs
252b5132 7110@cindex bug reports
ff5dcc92 7111@cindex @command{ld} bugs, reporting
252b5132
RH
7112
7113A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu}
ff5dcc92 7114products. If you obtained @command{ld} from a support organization, we
252b5132
RH
7115recommend you contact that organization first.
7116
7117You can find contact information for many support companies and
7118individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
7119distribution.
7120
ad22bfe8 7121@ifset BUGURL
ff5dcc92 7122Otherwise, send bug reports for @command{ld} to
ad22bfe8
JM
7123@value{BUGURL}.
7124@end ifset
252b5132
RH
7125
7126The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
7127@strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
7128fact or leave it out, state it!
7129
7130Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
7131problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
b553b183
NC
7132assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not
7133matter. Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps
7134the bug is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the
7135location where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name
7136were different, the contents of that location would fool the linker
7137into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and give a
7138specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
c0065db7 7139and the most helpful.
b553b183
NC
7140
7141Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
7142the bug if it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports
7143on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
252b5132
RH
7144
7145Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
36f63dca
NC
7146bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
7147respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
7148You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
252b5132
RH
7149
7150To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
7151
7152@itemize @bullet
7153@item
ff5dcc92 7154The version of @command{ld}. @command{ld} announces it if you start it with
252b5132
RH
7155the @samp{--version} argument.
7156
7157Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
ff5dcc92 7158the bug in the current version of @command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
7159
7160@item
ff5dcc92 7161Any patches you may have applied to the @command{ld} source, including any
252b5132
RH
7162patches made to the @code{BFD} library.
7163
7164@item
7165The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
7166version number.
7167
7168@item
ff5dcc92 7169What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{ld}---e.g.
252b5132
RH
7170``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
7171
7172@item
7173The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
7174observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important,
7175list them all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is
7176sufficient.
7177
7178If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
7179and then we might not encounter the bug.
7180
7181@item
7182A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce the
b553b183
NC
7183bug. It is generally most helpful to send the actual object files
7184provided that they are reasonably small. Say no more than 10K. For
7185bigger files you can either make them available by FTP or HTTP or else
7186state that you are willing to send the object file(s) to whomever
7187requests them. (Note - your email will be going to a mailing list, so
7188we do not want to clog it up with large attachments). But small
7189attachments are best.
252b5132
RH
7190
7191If the source files were assembled using @code{gas} or compiled using
7192@code{gcc}, then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
7193object files. In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
7194@code{gas} or @code{gcc} was used to produce the object files. Also say
7195how @code{gas} or @code{gcc} were configured.
7196
7197@item
7198A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
7199incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
7200
ff5dcc92 7201Of course, if the bug is that @command{ld} gets a fatal signal, then we
252b5132
RH
7202will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might
7203not notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us
7204a chance to make a mistake.
7205
7206Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
7207say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your
b45619c0 7208copy of @command{ld} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the
252b5132
RH
7209C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash
7210and ours would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours
7211fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not happening for us. If
7212you had not told us to expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw
7213any conclusion from our observations.
7214
7215@item
ff5dcc92 7216If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{ld} source, send us context
252b5132
RH
7217diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or
7218@samp{-p} option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.
ff5dcc92 7219If you even discuss something in the @command{ld} source, refer to it by
252b5132
RH
7220context, not by line number.
7221
7222The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
7223sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
7224@end itemize
7225
7226Here are some things that are not necessary:
7227
7228@itemize @bullet
7229@item
7230A description of the envelope of the bug.
7231
7232Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
7233which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
7234changes will not affect it.
7235
7236This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
7237will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
7238with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
7239We recommend that you save your time for something else.
7240
7241Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
7242of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
7243output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
7244less time, and so on.
7245
7246However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
7247report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
7248
7249@item
7250A patch for the bug.
7251
7252A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
7253the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
7254a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
7255to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
7256
ff5dcc92 7257Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{ld} it is very hard to
252b5132
RH
7258construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
7259through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be
7260able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is
7261fixed.
7262
7263And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
7264patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
7265help us to understand.
7266
7267@item
7268A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
7269
7270Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
7271things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
7272@end itemize
7273
7274@node MRI
7275@appendix MRI Compatible Script Files
7276@cindex MRI compatibility
ff5dcc92
SC
7277To aid users making the transition to @sc{gnu} @command{ld} from the MRI
7278linker, @command{ld} can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an
252b5132
RH
7279alternative to the more general-purpose linker scripting language
7280described in @ref{Scripts}. MRI compatible linker scripts have a much
7281simpler command set than the scripting language otherwise used with
ff5dcc92 7282@command{ld}. @sc{gnu} @command{ld} supports the most commonly used MRI
252b5132
RH
7283linker commands; these commands are described here.
7284
7285In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the @code{a.out} object
7286file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
7287features to make use of them.
7288
7289You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
7290@samp{-c} command-line option.
7291
7292Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
7293command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
7294blank lines are also allowed for punctuation). If a line of an
ff5dcc92 7295MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
7296issues a warning message, but continues processing the script.
7297
7298Lines beginning with @samp{*} are comments.
7299
7300You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
7301lower case; for example, @samp{chip} is the same as @samp{CHIP}.
7302The following list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
7303
7304@table @code
7305@cindex @code{ABSOLUTE} (MRI)
7306@item ABSOLUTE @var{secname}
7307@itemx ABSOLUTE @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 7308Normally, @command{ld} includes in the output file all sections from all
252b5132
RH
7309the input files. However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can use the
7310@code{ABSOLUTE} command to restrict the sections that will be present in
7311your output program. If the @code{ABSOLUTE} command is used at all in a
7312script, then only the sections named explicitly in @code{ABSOLUTE}
7313commands will appear in the linker output. You can still use other
7314input sections (whatever you select on the command line, or using
7315@code{LOAD}) to resolve addresses in the output file.
7316
7317@cindex @code{ALIAS} (MRI)
7318@item ALIAS @var{out-secname}, @var{in-secname}
7319Use this command to place the data from input section @var{in-secname}
7320in a section called @var{out-secname} in the linker output file.
7321
7322@var{in-secname} may be an integer.
7323
7324@cindex @code{ALIGN} (MRI)
7325@item ALIGN @var{secname} = @var{expression}
7326Align the section called @var{secname} to @var{expression}. The
7327@var{expression} should be a power of two.
7328
7329@cindex @code{BASE} (MRI)
7330@item BASE @var{expression}
7331Use the value of @var{expression} as the lowest address (other than
7332absolute addresses) in the output file.
7333
7334@cindex @code{CHIP} (MRI)
7335@item CHIP @var{expression}
7336@itemx CHIP @var{expression}, @var{expression}
7337This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
7338
7339@cindex @code{END} (MRI)
7340@item END
7341This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for compatibility.
7342
7343@cindex @code{FORMAT} (MRI)
7344@item FORMAT @var{output-format}
7345Similar to the @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command in the more general linker
a1ab1d2a 7346language, but restricted to one of these output formats:
252b5132
RH
7347
7348@enumerate
a1ab1d2a 7349@item
252b5132
RH
7350S-records, if @var{output-format} is @samp{S}
7351
7352@item
7353IEEE, if @var{output-format} is @samp{IEEE}
7354
7355@item
7356COFF (the @samp{coff-m68k} variant in BFD), if @var{output-format} is
7357@samp{COFF}
7358@end enumerate
7359
7360@cindex @code{LIST} (MRI)
7361@item LIST @var{anything}@dots{}
7362Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
ff5dcc92 7363@command{ld} command-line option @samp{-M}.
252b5132
RH
7364
7365The keyword @code{LIST} may be followed by anything on the
7366same line, with no change in its effect.
7367
7368@cindex @code{LOAD} (MRI)
7369@item LOAD @var{filename}
7370@itemx LOAD @var{filename}, @var{filename}, @dots{} @var{filename}
7371Include one or more object file @var{filename} in the link; this has the
ff5dcc92 7372same effect as specifying @var{filename} directly on the @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
7373command line.
7374
7375@cindex @code{NAME} (MRI)
7376@item NAME @var{output-name}
ff5dcc92 7377@var{output-name} is the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; the
252b5132
RH
7378MRI-compatible command @code{NAME} is equivalent to the command-line
7379option @samp{-o} or the general script language command @code{OUTPUT}.
7380
7381@cindex @code{ORDER} (MRI)
7382@item ORDER @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
7383@itemx ORDER @var{secname} @var{secname} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 7384Normally, @command{ld} orders the sections in its output file in the
252b5132
RH
7385order in which they first appear in the input files. In an MRI-compatible
7386script, you can override this ordering with the @code{ORDER} command. The
7387sections you list with @code{ORDER} will appear first in your output
7388file, in the order specified.
7389
7390@cindex @code{PUBLIC} (MRI)
7391@item PUBLIC @var{name}=@var{expression}
7392@itemx PUBLIC @var{name},@var{expression}
7393@itemx PUBLIC @var{name} @var{expression}
7394Supply a value (@var{expression}) for external symbol
7395@var{name} used in the linker input files.
7396
7397@cindex @code{SECT} (MRI)
7398@item SECT @var{secname}, @var{expression}
7399@itemx SECT @var{secname}=@var{expression}
7400@itemx SECT @var{secname} @var{expression}
7401You can use any of these three forms of the @code{SECT} command to
7402specify the start address (@var{expression}) for section @var{secname}.
7403If you have more than one @code{SECT} statement for the same
7404@var{secname}, only the @emph{first} sets the start address.
7405@end table
7406
793c5807
NC
7407@node GNU Free Documentation License
7408@appendix GNU Free Documentation License
36f63dca 7409@include fdl.texi
704c465c 7410
370b66a1
CD
7411@node LD Index
7412@unnumbered LD Index
252b5132
RH
7413
7414@printindex cp
7415
7416@tex
7417% I think something like @colophon should be in texinfo. In the
7418% meantime:
7419\long\def\colophon{\hbox to0pt{}\vfill
7420\centerline{The body of this manual is set in}
7421\centerline{\fontname\tenrm,}
7422\centerline{with headings in {\bf\fontname\tenbf}}
7423\centerline{and examples in {\tt\fontname\tentt}.}
7424\centerline{{\it\fontname\tenit\/} and}
7425\centerline{{\sl\fontname\tensl\/}}
7426\centerline{are used for emphasis.}\vfill}
7427\page\colophon
7428% Blame: doc@cygnus.com, 28mar91.
7429@end tex
7430
252b5132 7431@bye
This page took 0.862501 seconds and 4 git commands to generate.